TW202212125A - Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component - Google Patents

Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202212125A
TW202212125A TW110128733A TW110128733A TW202212125A TW 202212125 A TW202212125 A TW 202212125A TW 110128733 A TW110128733 A TW 110128733A TW 110128733 A TW110128733 A TW 110128733A TW 202212125 A TW202212125 A TW 202212125A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
polymer
less
meth
monomer
adhesive
Prior art date
Application number
TW110128733A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
舟木千尋
佐佐木翔悟
Original Assignee
日商日東電工股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商日東電工股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商日東電工股份有限公司
Publication of TW202212125A publication Critical patent/TW202212125A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • C09J7/381Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA] based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/385Acrylic polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/30Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising vinyl (co)polymers; comprising acrylic (co)polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/04Interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/12Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L43/00Compositions of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • C08L43/04Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J11/00Features of adhesives not provided for in group C09J9/00, e.g. additives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J143/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium, or a metal; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J143/04Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J175/00Adhesives based on polyureas or polyurethanes; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J175/04Polyurethanes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2270/00Resin or rubber layer containing a blend of at least two different polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/312Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier parameters being the characterizing feature

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a reinforcement film which is easily detachable in an initial stage following bonding to an adherend, can significantly increase adhesive strength thereafter, and exhibits flexural recoverability and flexural retention properties. The reinforcement film is provided with an adhesive layer. The adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B). The polymer (B) contains a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth)acrylic monomer unit. The adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1-20 kPa at 23 DEG C.

Description

補強用膜、光學構件及電子構件Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member

本發明係關於一種補強用膜、以及貼合有該補強用膜之光學構件及電子構件。本申請主張基於2020年8月6日提出申請之日本專利申請2020-134187號之優先權,該申請之全部內容以參照之方式組入本說明書中。The present invention relates to a reinforcing film, and an optical member and an electronic member to which the reinforcing film is bonded. This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-134187 filed on August 6, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

黏著劑以將被黏著體彼此接著、或將物品固定於被黏著體等為目的,以黏著片材之形態廣泛用於行動電話、智慧型手機、平板型個人電腦等攜帶型電子機器及其他電子機器等各種用途。例如,黏著片材被用作對構成上述機器之光學構件或電子構件等賦予剛性或耐衝擊性之補強材(補強用膜)。作為揭示此種先前技術之文獻,可例舉專利文獻1及2。Adhesives are widely used in portable electronic devices such as mobile phones, smart phones, tablet personal computers, etc., and other electronic Machines and other uses. For example, the adhesive sheet is used as a reinforcing material (reinforcing film) that imparts rigidity or impact resistance to optical members, electronic members, and the like constituting the above-mentioned apparatus. As a document which discloses such a prior art, patent documents 1 and 2 are mentioned.

又,近年來,能夠彎折或捲曲之攜帶型電子機器受到關注,正在推進開發一種可用於固定此種電子機器中內置之可撓性裝置(典型的是有機EL(Electroluminescence,電致發光)或液晶顯示裝置等圖像顯示裝置)等的黏著片材(專利文獻3~6)。In addition, in recent years, portable electronic devices that can be bent or rolled have attracted attention, and development of a flexible device (typically organic EL (Electroluminescence) or Adhesive sheets for image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices) and the like (Patent Documents 3 to 6).

另一方面,著眼於黏著劑之性能,近來提出有一種黏著片材,其能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示較低之黏著力,其後使黏著力大幅地上升(專利文獻7)。根據具有此種特性之黏著片材,可於黏著力上升前發揮對於抑制黏著片材之貼錯或貼壞所導致之良率降低有用之重貼性(二次加工性),且於黏著力上升後發揮適於黏著片材原本之使用目的之強黏著性。 先前技術文獻 專利文獻 On the other hand, focusing on the performance of the adhesive, an adhesive sheet has recently been proposed, which can exhibit a low adhesive force in the initial stage of being attached to an adherend, and then significantly increase the adhesive force (Patent Document 7). . According to the adhesive sheet having such characteristics, the re-adhesion property (secondary workability), which is useful for suppressing the yield reduction caused by misapplied or damaged adhesive sheet, can be exhibited before the adhesive force is increased, and the adhesive force can be improved. After rising, it exhibits strong adhesiveness suitable for the original purpose of the adhesive sheet. prior art literature Patent Literature

專利文獻1:日本專利第6366199號公報 專利文獻2:日本專利第6366200號公報 專利文獻3:日本專利第6376271號公報 專利文獻4:日本專利申請公開2016-108555號公報 專利文獻5:日本專利申請公開2017-095657號公報 專利文獻6:日本專利申請公開2017-095659號公報 專利文獻7:日本專利第6373458號公報 Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 6366199 Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent No. 6366200 Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent No. 6376271 Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-108555 Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-095657 Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-095659 Patent Document 7: Japanese Patent No. 6373458

[發明所欲解決之問題][Problems to be Solved by Invention]

補強用膜亦可用於上述可撓性裝置。例如於上述可撓性裝置之製造中,構成該裝置之構件多數情況下較薄,因此較理想為貼附黏著片材作為補強用膜進行補強,防止因裝置變形產生之不良情況,或提高操作性。由於可撓性裝置可反覆彎折或彎曲,故要求用於可撓性裝置之補強用膜具有於反覆彎曲之情形時亦正常地回復形狀之特性(彎曲回復性),且具有不會產生剝離等不良情況之特性(彎曲保持力)。此種具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之補強用膜由於可用於包括可撓性裝置在內之各種用途,故適用範圍之限制較少而較為有用。The reinforcing film can also be used for the above-mentioned flexible device. For example, in the manufacture of the above-mentioned flexible device, the components constituting the device are often thin, so it is desirable to stick an adhesive sheet as a reinforcing film for reinforcement to prevent defects caused by device deformation, or to improve the operation. sex. Since the flexible device can be repeatedly bent or bent, the reinforcing film used for the flexible device is required to have the property of recovering its shape normally even when it is repeatedly bent (bending recovery), and to have no peeling. and other undesirable characteristics (bending retention force). Such a reinforcing film with bending recovery and bending retention force can be used for various purposes including flexible devices, so the scope of application is less restricted and more useful.

例如,關於如專利文獻7所提出之構成為於貼附初期顯示低黏著力,其後黏著力大幅地上升的黏著劑,亦較理想為於用作補強用膜之情形時具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。作為改善彎曲保持力之一方法,例如考慮適當設定黏著劑之儲存彈性模數之方法。但是,如上所述設計為黏著力上升之黏著劑若改變儲存彈性模數,則初期低黏著力及上升後黏著力兩者均會受到影響。又,除彎曲保持力以外,還要考慮彎曲回復性,滿足該等所有特性並不容易。關於在貼附初期顯示低黏著力,其後黏著力大幅地上升之黏著劑,只要可改善彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力,則於實際應用中有益。 For example, an adhesive having a structure such as that proposed in Patent Document 7, which exhibits a low adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment, and then greatly increases its adhesive force, is also preferably used as a reinforcing film to have bending recovery properties and Bend retention. As one method of improving the bending holding force, for example, a method of appropriately setting the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive is considered. However, if the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive designed to increase the adhesive force as described above is changed, both the initial low adhesive force and the adhesive force after the increase will be affected. Furthermore, in addition to the bending retention force, the bending recovery property is also considered, and it is not easy to satisfy all these properties. As for the adhesive which shows low adhesive force in the initial stage of attachment, and then greatly increases the adhesive force, it is useful in practical application as long as the bending recovery and bending retention can be improved.

本發明係鑒於上述情況而創作者,目的在於提供一種補強用膜,其能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示輕剝離性,其後使黏著力大幅地上升,且具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。又,本發明之另一目的在於提供一種貼合有上述補強用膜之光學構件及電子構件。 [解決問題之技術手段] The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a reinforcing film which can exhibit light peeling properties at the initial stage of being attached to an adherend, and can significantly increase the adhesive force thereafter, and has bending recovery properties and bending properties. Retentivity. Moreover, another object of this invention is to provide the optical member and the electronic member to which the said film for reinforcement was bonded. [Technical means to solve problems]

根據本說明書,可提供一種具備黏著劑層之補強用膜。上述黏著劑層包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)。上述聚合物(B)包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元。又,上述黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa。According to the present specification, a reinforcing film provided with an adhesive layer can be provided. The said adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B). The said polymer (B) contains the monomer unit which has a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, and a (meth)acrylic-type monomer unit. Moreover, the surface elastic modulus of the said adhesive layer at 23 degreeC is 1-20 kPa.

根據上述構成,黏著劑層由於包含聚合物(A)及含有具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元之聚合物(B),故能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示輕剝離性,其後使黏著力大幅地上升。又,上述補強用膜具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。具體而言,黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)為1 kPa以上的補強用膜會發揮上述黏著特性並且具有良好之彎曲回復性。又,藉由使黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數為20 kPa以下,會發揮上述黏著特性並且具有良好之彎曲保持力,因此即便於以反覆彎折之態樣使用之情形時,亦不易產生剝離等不良情況。According to the above configuration, since the adhesive layer contains the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) containing the monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, it can exhibit light peelability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend, After that, the adhesive force was greatly increased. Moreover, the said reinforcement film has a bending recovery property and a bending retention force. Specifically, a reinforcing film having a surface modulus of elasticity at 23° C. (23° C. surface modulus of elasticity) of the adhesive layer of 1 kPa or more exhibits the above-mentioned adhesive properties and has good flexural recovery. In addition, by making the surface modulus of elasticity at 23°C of the adhesive layer to be 20 kPa or less, the above-mentioned adhesive properties are exhibited and good bending retention force is obtained, so even when used in a state of repeated bending, it is not easy to Defects such as peeling occur.

此處所揭示之技術(包括補強用膜、光學構件及電子構件,以下同樣)之若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G' 23為10~200 kPa。藉由具有該範圍之體積彈性模數G' 23之黏著劑,貼附初期之黏著力容易成為輕剝離性優異之適宜範圍。又,加工性優異,一般有容易兼顧常溫區域之應變緩和性與彎曲回復性之傾向。 In some preferred aspects of the technology disclosed herein (including reinforcing films, optical components, and electronic components, the same below), the bulk modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer at 23°C is 10-200 kPa. With the adhesive having a bulk modulus of elasticity G' 23 in this range, the adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability, and in general, it tends to be easy to achieve both strain relaxation properties and bending recovery properties in the normal temperature region.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於80℃下之體積彈性模數G' 80為5~100 kPa。具有該範圍之體積彈性模數G' 80之黏著劑一般容易兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力。例如即便於在80℃左右之高溫條件下使用之情形時,亦可具有適於彎曲回復之彈性,且具有實現彎曲保持力之接著保持力。 In some preferred aspects, the bulk modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C is 5-100 kPa. Adhesives having a bulk modulus of elasticity G'80 in this range are generally easy to achieve both flexural recovery and flexural retention. For example, even when used at a high temperature of about 80° C., it can have elasticity suitable for bending recovery, and has a holding force to achieve bending retention.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於80℃下之tanδ 80為0.10~0.60。上述tanδ 80(80℃下之損失彈性模數G'' 80/80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80)為0.10以上之黏著劑容易發揮適於保持彎曲之接著力。又,藉由使上述tanδ 80為0.60以下,容易抑制黏著劑之塑性變形,獲得良好之彎曲回復性。又,於將補強用膜長時間保持為彎曲狀態之情形時,亦容易發揮不會自被黏著體剝離之保持力(彎曲保持力)。 In some preferred aspects, the tanδ 80 of the above-mentioned adhesive layer at 80° C. is 0.10˜0.60. The adhesive whose tanδ 80 (loss elastic modulus G'' 80 at 80°C/storage elastic modulus G' 80 at 80°C) of 0.10 or more is likely to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for maintaining bending. Moreover, by making the said tan delta 80 into 0.60 or less, it becomes easy to suppress the plastic deformation of an adhesive agent, and a favorable bending recovery property is obtained. In addition, even when the reinforcing film is kept in a bent state for a long time, the retention force (bending retention force) that does not peel off from the adherend is easily exhibited.

上述聚合物(A)較佳為丙烯酸系聚合物。藉由包含作為丙烯酸系聚合物之聚合物(A)、及含有具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元之聚合物(B)的黏著劑層,容易良好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。The above-mentioned polymer (A) is preferably an acrylic polymer. The effects of the technology disclosed herein are easily and well achieved by the adhesive layer comprising the polymer (A) as an acrylic polymer and the polymer (B) comprising a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton .

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層中之上述聚合物(B)之含量相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.5~5重量份。藉由將相對於聚合物(A)100重量份之聚合物(B)之量設為0.5重量份以上,容易獲得貼附初期之輕剝離性。藉由將上述聚合物(B)之量設為5重量份以下,容易實現目標之黏著力上升。又,藉由將聚合物(B)之使用量設為上述範圍,容易實現良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。In some preferred aspects, the content of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to 0.5 parts by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), it is easy to obtain light peelability in the initial stage of attachment. By making the quantity of the said polymer (B) into 5 weight part or less, it becomes easy to achieve the objective adhesive force improvement. Moreover, by making the usage-amount of a polymer (B) into the said range, it becomes easy to implement|achieve favorable bending recovery property and bending retention force.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層中所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03。上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002以上之黏著劑層有彎曲回復性優異之傾向,有加工性亦優異之傾向。又,藉由將上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])設為0.03以下,有容易實現適宜之黏著力上升之傾向。再者,於黏著劑層中,異氰酸基與羥基可以其等之至少一部分進行化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。上述黏著劑層係包含例如交聯劑者,於該構成中,上述異氰酸基例如可為交聯劑之一部份,上述羥基例如可為聚合物(A)之一部分。In some preferred aspects, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of isocyanate groups and hydroxyl groups contained in the adhesive layer is 0.002-0.03. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of 0.002 or more tends to be excellent in flexural recovery and also tends to be excellent in processability. Moreover, by making the said molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) into 0.03 or less, there exists a tendency for a suitable adhesive force improvement to be easy to implement. Furthermore, in the adhesive layer, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state in which at least a part of them is chemically bonded (crosslinked). The above-mentioned adhesive layer contains, for example, a cross-linking agent. In this configuration, the above-mentioned isocyanate group may be, for example, a part of the cross-linking agent, and the above-mentioned hydroxyl group may be, for example, a part of the polymer (A).

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層包含觸媒。又,上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10 -6~5.0×10 -2。藉由包含相對於黏著劑層中之羥基量為規定量以上之觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,而容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,藉由使觸媒之使用量相對於黏著劑層中之羥基量為規定量以下,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。上述觸媒更佳為鐵系觸媒,上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])進而較佳為1.0×10 -4~1.0×10 -3In some preferred aspects, the above-mentioned adhesive layer includes a catalyst. Moreover, the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the said catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the said adhesive layer is 1.0* 10-6 - 5.0* 10-2 . By including the catalyst in a predetermined amount or more with respect to the amount of hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer, generation of air bubbles in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, and a smooth adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Moreover, by making the usage-amount of a catalyst less than predetermined amount with respect to the amount of hydroxyl groups in an adhesive layer, it becomes easy to implement|achieve a suitable adhesive force improvement. The catalyst is more preferably an iron-based catalyst, and the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is more preferably 1.0×10 −4 to 1.0× 10-3 .

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適宜作為加工或搬送偏光板、波長板等光學構件時對該光學構件賦予剛性或耐衝擊性之補強用膜。因此,根據本說明書,可提供一種貼合有此處所揭示之任一補強用膜之光學構件。The reinforcing film disclosed here is suitable as a reinforcing film for imparting rigidity or impact resistance to optical members when processing or conveying optical members such as polarizers and wave plates, for example. Therefore, according to this specification, it is possible to provide an optical member to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein are bonded.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如亦適宜作為攜帶型電子機器等機器之電子構件之補強用膜。因此,根據本說明書,可提供一種貼合有此處所揭示之任一補強用膜之電子構件。Moreover, the film for reinforcement disclosed here is suitable also as a film for reinforcement of electronic components of apparatuses, such as a portable electronic apparatus, for example. Therefore, according to this specification, it is possible to provide an electronic component to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein are bonded.

以下,對本發明之較佳實施方式進行說明。關於本說明書中特別言及之事項以外之實施本發明所需要之事項,業者可基於本說明書所記載之關於實施發明之指示及申請時之技術常識而理解。本發明可基於本說明書所揭示之內容及該領域之技術常識而實施。 再者,於以下圖式中,有時對發揮相同作用之構件、部位標註相同符號進行說明,有時省略或簡化重複之說明。又,圖式所記載之實施方式係為了清楚地說明本發明而模式化,未必準確地表示出實際提供之製品之尺寸或比例尺。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described. Matters necessary for implementing the present invention other than those specifically mentioned in this specification can be understood by the practitioner based on the instructions for implementing the invention described in this specification and the technical common sense at the time of application. The present invention can be implemented based on the contents disclosed in this specification and common technical knowledge in the field. In addition, in the following drawings, the same reference numerals may be used to describe members and parts that perform the same functions, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted or simplified in some cases. In addition, the embodiment described in the drawings is modeled for clearly explaining the present invention, and does not necessarily accurately represent the size or scale of the product actually provided.

又,於本說明書中,「丙烯酸系聚合物」係指於聚合物結構中含有源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元之聚合物,典型而言係指以超過50重量%之比率含有源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元之聚合物。又,(甲基)丙烯酸系單體係指於1分子中具有至少一個(甲基)丙烯醯基之單體。此處,「(甲基)丙烯醯基」係包括丙烯醯基及甲基丙烯醯基之含義。因此,此處所謂(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之概念可包含具有丙烯醯基之單體(丙烯酸系單體)與具有甲基丙烯醯基之單體(甲基丙烯酸系單體)兩者。同樣地,於本說明書中,「(甲基)丙烯酸」係包括丙烯酸及甲基丙烯酸之含義,「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」係包括丙烯酸酯及甲基丙烯酸酯之含義。In addition, in this specification, "acrylic polymer" refers to a polymer containing a monomer unit derived from a (meth)acrylic monomer in the polymer structure, and typically refers to a polymer containing more than 50% by weight of A ratio of polymers containing monomeric units derived from (meth)acrylic monomers. Moreover, a (meth)acrylic-type monomer system means the monomer which has at least one (meth)acryloyl group in 1 molecule. Here, the "(meth)acryloyl group" includes the meaning of an acryl group and a methacryloyl group. Therefore, the concept of the so-called (meth)acrylic monomer here can include both a monomer having an acryl group (acrylic monomer) and a monomer having a methacryloyl group (methacrylic monomer) . Similarly, in this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" includes the meaning of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, and "(meth)acrylate" includes the meaning of acrylate and methacrylate.

<補強用膜之結構例> 此處所揭示之補強用膜具有黏著片材之形態,該黏著片材具有由黏著劑形成之黏著面。用作補強用膜之黏著片材包含黏著劑層。此處所揭示之補強用膜可為於支持基材之單面或雙面積層有上述黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態,亦可為不具有支持基材之無基材之黏著片材之形態。以下,有時亦將支持基材簡稱為「基材」。 再者,本說明書中,「補強用膜」係指如後所述用於補強被黏著體之黏著片材(補強用黏著膜)。補強用膜例如可以無基材之黏著片材之形態於一黏著面貼附支持材等之後,將另一黏著面貼附於作為補強對象之被黏著體進行補強,因此並不限定於附基材之黏著片材之形態。就該方面而言,可理解為較具有附基材之黏著片材之形態之下述「補強膜」更廣義之概念。 <Structure example of reinforcement film> The reinforcing film disclosed here has the form of an adhesive sheet having an adhesive surface formed of an adhesive. The adhesive sheet used as the reinforcing film contains an adhesive layer. The reinforcing film disclosed herein may be in the form of a substrate-attached adhesive sheet with the above-mentioned adhesive layer on one or both surfaces of a supporting substrate, or may be a substrate-less adhesive without a supporting substrate. The form of the sheet. Hereinafter, the supporting substrate may also be simply referred to as a "substrate". In addition, in this specification, a "reinforcing film" means an adhesive sheet (reinforcing adhesive film) for reinforcing an adherend as described later. For example, the reinforcing film can be in the form of an adhesive sheet without a base material, after one adhesive surface is attached to a support material, etc., and the other adhesive surface is attached to the adherend as a reinforcement object for reinforcement, so it is not limited to the base. The form of the adhesive sheet of the material. In this respect, it can be understood as a broader concept than the following "reinforcing film" in the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material.

將一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖1。該補強用膜1係以附基材之單面黏著片材之形式構成,具備具有第一面10A及第二面10B之片狀支持基材10、以及設置於該第一面10A側之黏著劑層21。黏著劑層21固著於支持基材10之第一面10A側。補強用膜1係將黏著劑層21貼附於被黏著體而使用。如圖1所示,使用前(即貼附於被黏著體前)之補強用膜1可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜100之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜100係黏著劑層21之表面(黏著面)21A抵接於至少與黏著劑層21對向之側成為剝離性表面(剝離面)之剝離襯墊31之形態。作為剝離襯墊31,例如可良好地使用藉由在片狀基材(襯墊基材)之單面設置由剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層而以該單面成為剝離面之方式構成者。或者,亦可為省略剝離襯墊31,使用第二面10B成為剝離面之支持基材10,藉由將補強用膜1進行捲繞而使黏著面21A抵接於支持基材10之第二面10B之形態(捲筒形態)。於將補強用膜1貼附於被黏著體時,將剝離襯墊31或支持基材10之第二面10B自黏著面21A剝離,並將所露出之黏著面21A壓接於被黏著體。The structure of the reinforcing film of one embodiment is schematically shown in FIG. 1 . The reinforcing film 1 is constituted in the form of a single-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate, and includes a sheet-like support substrate 10 having a first surface 10A and a second surface 10B, and an adhesive provided on the side of the first surface 10A. agent layer 21. The adhesive layer 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A side of the support substrate 10 . The reinforcing film 1 is used by attaching the adhesive layer 21 to the adherend. As shown in FIG. 1 , the reinforcing film 1 before use (ie, before being attached to the adherend) can be a constituent element of the reinforcing film 100 with a release liner, and the reinforcing film 100 with a release liner is an adhesive The surface (adhesive surface) 21A of the adhesive layer 21 is in contact with at least the release liner 31 whose side opposite to the adhesive layer 21 is a releasable surface (release surface). As the release liner 31 , for example, by providing a release layer formed of a release treatment agent on one side of a sheet-like base material (liner base material), one formed so that the single side becomes a release surface can be favorably used. Alternatively, the release liner 31 may be omitted, and the second surface 10B of the support base 10 may be used as the release surface, and the adhesive surface 21A may be in contact with the second support base 10 by winding the reinforcing film 1 . The form of the surface 10B (roll form). When the reinforcing film 1 is attached to the adherend, the release liner 31 or the second surface 10B of the support substrate 10 is peeled off from the adhesive surface 21A, and the exposed adhesive surface 21A is crimped to the adherend.

將另一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖2。該補強用膜2係以附基材之雙面黏著片材之形式構成,具備具有第一面10A及第二面10B之片狀支持基材10、設置於該第一面10A側之黏著劑層21、以及設置於第二面10B側之黏著劑層22。黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層)21固著於支持基材10之第一面10A,黏著劑層(第二黏著劑層)22固著於支持基材10之第二面10B。補強用膜2係將黏著劑層21、22貼附於被黏著體之不同部位而使用。貼附黏著劑層21、22之部位可為不同構件各自之部位,亦可為單一構件內之不同部位。如圖2所示,使用前之補強用膜2可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜200之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜200係黏著劑層21之表面(第一黏著面)21A及黏著劑層22之表面(第二黏著面)22A抵接於至少與黏著劑層21、22對向之側分別成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31、32之形態。作為剝離襯墊31、32,例如可良好地使用藉由在片狀基材(襯墊基材)之單面設置由剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層而以該單面成為剝離面之方式構成者。或者,亦可省略剝離襯墊32,使用雙面成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31,藉由將其與補強用膜2重疊並捲繞成漩渦狀而構成第二黏著面22A抵接於剝離襯墊31之背面之形態(捲筒形態)的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。The structure of the reinforcing film of another embodiment is schematically shown in FIG. 2 . The reinforcing film 2 is constituted in the form of a double-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate, and includes a sheet-like support substrate 10 having a first surface 10A and a second surface 10B, and an adhesive provided on the side of the first surface 10A The layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 disposed on the second surface 10B side. The adhesive layer (first adhesive layer) 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A of the support substrate 10 , and the adhesive layer (second adhesive layer) 22 is fixed to the second surface 10B of the support substrate 10 . The reinforcing film 2 is used by attaching the adhesive layers 21 and 22 to different parts of the adherend. The positions where the adhesive layers 21 and 22 are attached may be the respective positions of different components, or may be different positions within a single component. As shown in FIG. 2 , the reinforcing film 2 before use can be a constituent element of the reinforcing film 200 with a release liner, and the reinforcing film 200 with a release liner is the surface (the first adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer 21 . ) 21A and the surface (second adhesive surface) 22A of the adhesive layer 22 are in contact with the release liners 31 and 32, which are at least the sides opposite to the adhesive layers 21 and 22, respectively, forming the release surface. As the release liners 31 and 32 , for example, one surface of a sheet-like base material (liner base material) can be preferably used by providing a release layer formed of a release treatment agent on one surface of the sheet-like base material (liner base material) so that the single surface becomes a release surface. By. Alternatively, the release liner 32 may be omitted, and the release liner 31 having both sides as the release surface may be used, and the second adhesive surface 22A may be in contact with the release liner by overlapping the reinforcing film 2 and winding it in a spiral shape. Reinforcing film with a release liner in the form (roll form) of the back surface of the pad 31 .

將又一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖3。該補強用膜3係以由黏著劑層21構成之無基材之雙面黏著片材之形式構成。補強用膜3係將包含黏著劑層21之一表面(第一面)之第一黏著面21A、與包含黏著劑層21之另一表面(第二面)之第二黏著面21B貼附於被黏著體之不同部位而使用。如圖3所示,使用前之補強用膜3可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜300之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜300係第一黏著面21A及第二黏著面)21B抵接於至少與黏著劑層21對向之側分別成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31、32之形態。或者,亦可省略剝離襯墊32,使用雙面成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31,藉由將其與補強用膜3重疊並捲繞成漩渦狀而構成第二黏著面21B抵接於剝離襯墊31之背面之形態(捲筒形態)的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。The structure of the reinforcing film of another embodiment is schematically shown in FIG. 3 . The reinforcing film 3 is constituted in the form of a double-sided adhesive sheet without a base material composed of an adhesive layer 21 . The reinforcing film 3 is attached to the first adhesive surface 21A including one surface (first surface) of the adhesive layer 21 and the second adhesive surface 21B including the other surface (second surface) of the adhesive layer 21 . It is used by different parts of the adherend. As shown in FIG. 3 , the reinforcing film 3 before use can be a constituent element of the reinforcing film 300 with a release liner, and the reinforcing film 300 with a release liner is the first adhesive surface 21A and the second adhesive surface) 21B is in contact with at least the form of the release liners 31 and 32 whose sides opposite to the adhesive layer 21 are the release surfaces, respectively. Alternatively, the release liner 32 may be omitted, and the release liner 31 having both sides as the release surface may be used, and the second adhesive surface 21B may be in contact with the release liner by overlapping the reinforcing film 3 and winding it in a spiral shape. Reinforcing film with a release liner in the form (roll form) of the back surface of the pad 31 .

再者,補強用膜可為捲筒形態,可為單片形態,亦可為根據用途或使用態樣而切斷、沖切加工成適當形狀等之形態。此處所揭示之技術中之黏著劑層典型的是連續形成,但並不限定於此,例如亦可形成為點狀、條狀等規則或無規之圖案。In addition, the film for reinforcement may be in a roll form, a single-piece form, or a form in which it is cut, punched, and processed into an appropriate shape according to the application or usage. The adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein is typically formed continuously, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed in regular or random patterns such as dots, strips, etc., for example.

<黏著劑層> 此處所揭示之補強用膜具備包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)之黏著劑層。此種黏著劑層可由黏著劑組成物形成,該黏著劑組成物含有作為單體原料A之完全聚合物或部分聚合物的聚合物(A)、及聚合物(B)。黏著劑組合物之形態並無特別限制,例如可為溶劑型、水分散型、熱熔型、活性能量線硬化型(例如光硬化型)等各種形態。 <Adhesive layer> The reinforcement film disclosed here is provided with the adhesive layer which consists of a polymer (A) and a polymer (B). Such an adhesive layer can be formed from an adhesive composition containing a polymer (A) that is a complete polymer or a partial polymer of the monomer raw material A, and a polymer (B). The form of the adhesive composition is not particularly limited, and for example, various forms such as solvent type, water dispersion type, hot melt type, active energy ray curing type (eg, photocurable type) can be used.

(23℃表面彈性模數) 此處所揭示之黏著劑層之特徵在於,其表面(黏著面)於23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)在1~20 kPa之範圍內。藉由使上述23℃表面彈性模數為1 kPa以上,可實現基於含有聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)之黏著特性,並且具有良好之彎曲回復性。又,藉由使上述表面彈性模數為20 kPa以下,可實現上述黏著特性,並且發揮良好之彎曲保持力。 (Surface elastic modulus at 23°C) The adhesive layer disclosed herein is characterized in that its surface (adhesive surface) has a surface modulus of elasticity at 23°C (surface modulus of elasticity at 23°C) in the range of 1 to 20 kPa. By making the above-mentioned surface elastic modulus at 23° C. to be 1 kPa or more, the adhesive properties based on the inclusion of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) can be realized, and a good bending recovery can be obtained. Moreover, by making the said surface elastic modulus 20 kPa or less, the said adhesive property can be achieved, and a favorable bending retention force can be exhibited.

就提高彎曲回復性之觀點而言,上述23℃表面彈性模數較佳為2 kPa以上,更佳為3 kPa以上,進而較佳為4 kPa以上(例如5 kPa以上),可為8 kPa以上,可為10 kPa以上,亦可為12 kPa以上(例如14 kPa以上)。呈現上述表面彈性模數越高,則初期輕剝離性越優異之傾向。又,就兼顧良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力並且良好地表現黏著力上升之觀點而言,上述23℃表面彈性模數適宜為15 kPa以下,較佳為12 kPa以下,更佳為9 kPa以下,進而較佳為7 kPa以下(例如6 kPa以下),亦可為4 kPa以下。From the viewpoint of improving flexural recovery, the above-mentioned 23°C surface elastic modulus is preferably 2 kPa or more, more preferably 3 kPa or more, still more preferably 4 kPa or more (for example, 5 kPa or more), and may be 8 kPa or more. , which may be 10 kPa or more, or 12 kPa or more (for example, 14 kPa or more). The higher the surface elastic modulus, the more excellent the initial light peelability tends to be. In addition, from the viewpoint of achieving satisfactory bending resilience and bending retention force and exhibiting a satisfactory increase in adhesive force, the above-mentioned surface modulus of elasticity at 23°C is preferably 15 kPa or less, preferably 12 kPa or less, more preferably 9 kPa Hereinafter, it is more preferably 7 kPa or less (for example, 6 kPa or less), and may be 4 kPa or less.

黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數可藉由聚合物(A)之種類或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度、分子結構等)、聚合物(B)之種類(化學結構等)或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度等)、使用量、交聯劑之種類或使用量等進行調節。黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數係藉由下述實施例所記載之方法進行測定。The 23°C surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer can be determined by the type or characteristics (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.) of the polymer (A), the type (chemical structure, etc.) or characteristics (molecular weight, etc.) of the polymer (B). (or glass transition temperature, etc.), usage amount, type or usage amount of crosslinking agent, etc. The 23°C surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer was measured by the method described in the following examples.

(23℃體積彈性模數G' 23) 黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G' 23(23℃體積彈性模數G' 23)可於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23適宜設為10 kPa以上。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 23設為規定值以上,貼附初期之黏著力容易成為輕剝離性優異之適宜範圍。又,加工性優異,一般有常溫區域之彎曲回復性亦優異之傾向。上述體積彈性模數G' 23較佳為15 kPa以上,更佳為20 kPa以上,進而較佳為25 kPa以上,尤佳為30 kPa以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 23可為50 kPa以上,可為80 kPa以上,亦可為100 kPa以上。 (23°C bulk elastic modulus G' 23 ) The bulk elastic modulus G' 23 (23°C bulk elastic modulus G' 23 ) of the adhesive layer at 23°C can be within the range that satisfies the above-mentioned 23°C surface elastic modulus It can be set appropriately within the range, and is not limited to a specific range. In some aspects, the 23°C bulk elastic modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer is preferably set to 10 kPa or more. By making the said bulk elastic modulus G'23 into a predetermined value or more, the adhesive force in the initial stage of sticking easily becomes a suitable range which is excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability, and generally has a tendency to be excellent in bending recovery properties in the normal temperature region. The above-mentioned bulk modulus G' 23 is preferably 15 kPa or more, more preferably 20 kPa or more, still more preferably 25 kPa or more, particularly preferably 30 kPa or more. In other aspects, the bulk modulus G' 23 may be greater than 50 kPa, greater than or equal to 80 kPa, or greater than or equal to 100 kPa.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23適宜設為200 kPa以下。上述體積彈性模數G' 23為規定值以下之黏著劑一般有常溫區域之應變緩和性優異之傾向,又,容易表現黏著力上升。上述體積彈性模數G' 23較佳為150 kPa以下,更佳為90 kPa以下。於若干較佳態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 23可為60 kPa以下,亦可為40 kPa以下(例如35 kPa以下)。 In some aspects, the 23°C bulk modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer is preferably set to be 200 kPa or less. The adhesive whose bulk modulus G' 23 is below a predetermined value generally tends to be excellent in strain relaxation in the normal temperature region, and also tends to exhibit an increase in adhesive force. The above-mentioned bulk modulus G' 23 is preferably 150 kPa or less, more preferably 90 kPa or less. In some preferred aspects, the bulk modulus of elasticity G' 23 may be below 60 kPa, or below 40 kPa (eg, below 35 kPa).

(80℃體積彈性模數G' 80) 黏著劑層於80℃下之體積彈性模數G' 80(80℃體積彈性模數G' 80)係於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃體積彈性模數G' 80較佳為5 kPa以上。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 80設為規定值以上,一般容易提昇彎曲回復性,即便於高溫條件下使用之情形時,亦可具有適於彎曲回復之彈性。於若干較佳態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為7 kPa以上,可為9 kPa以上,亦可為10 kPa以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為15 kPa以上,可為30 kPa以上,亦可為50 kPa以上。 (80°C bulk modulus G' 80 ) The bulk modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C (80°C bulk modulus G' 80 ) is within the range that satisfies the above-mentioned 23°C surface modulus It can be set appropriately within the range, and is not limited to a specific range. In some aspects, the 80°C bulk modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer is preferably 5 kPa or more. By setting the above-mentioned bulk modulus G' 80 to a predetermined value or more, it is generally easy to improve the flexural recovery, and even when used under high temperature conditions, it is possible to have elasticity suitable for the flexural recovery. In some preferred aspects, the bulk modulus of elasticity G' 80 may be greater than or equal to 7 kPa, greater than or equal to 9 kPa, or greater than or equal to 10 kPa. In other aspects, the bulk modulus G' 80 may be greater than 15 kPa, greater than or equal to 30 kPa, or greater than or equal to 50 kPa.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃體積彈性模數G' 80適宜設為100 kPa以下。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 80限制為規定值以下,一般容易獲得良好之彎曲保持力,容易兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力。例如可於包括高溫條件之各種環境下,具有適於彎曲回復之彈性,具有實現彎曲保持力之接著保持力。上述體積彈性模數G' 80較佳為90 kPa以下,更佳為60 kPa以下。於若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為20 kPa以下,可為16 kPa以下,亦可為14 kPa以下(例如12 kPa以下)。 In some aspects, the 80°C bulk modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer is preferably set to 100 kPa or less. By limiting the above-mentioned bulk modulus G'80 to a predetermined value or less, it is generally easy to obtain a good bending holding force, and it is easy to achieve both the bending resilience and the bending holding force. For example, under various environments including high temperature conditions, it has elasticity suitable for bending recovery, and has a subsequent retention force to achieve bending retention force. The above-mentioned bulk modulus G' 80 is preferably 90 kPa or less, more preferably 60 kPa or less. In some aspects, the above-mentioned bulk modulus G' 80 may be 20 kPa or less, 16 kPa or less, or 14 kPa or less (eg, 12 kPa or less).

(80℃tanδ 80) 黏著劑層於80℃下之tanδ 80(80℃tanδ 80)係於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃tanδ 80適宜設為0.10以上。上述tanδ 80越高,則黏著劑越容易發揮適於彎曲保持之接著力。上述tanδ 80較佳為0.20以上。於若干較佳態樣中,上述tanδ 80可為0.30以上,可為0.40以上,亦可為0.45以上。 (80°C tanδ 80 ) The tanδ 80 (80°C tanδ 80 ) of the adhesive layer at 80°C is appropriately set within the range satisfying the above-mentioned 23°C surface elastic modulus, and is not limited to a specific range. In some aspects, the 80°C tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer is preferably set to 0.10 or more. The higher the above-mentioned tanδ 80 , the easier it is for the adhesive to exert an adhesive force suitable for bending retention. The above-mentioned tanδ 80 is preferably 0.20 or more. In some preferred aspects, the above-mentioned tanδ 80 may be greater than or equal to 0.30, greater than or equal to 0.40, or greater than or equal to 0.45.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃tanδ 80較佳為0.60以下。藉由使上述tanδ 80為0.60以下,可抑制黏著劑之塑性變形,容易獲得良好之彎曲回復性。又,於將補強用膜長時間保持為彎曲狀態之情形時,亦容易發揮不會自被黏著體發生剝離之保持力。進而,黏著力上升亦容易成為適宜範圍。上述80℃tanδ 80可為0.55以下。於其他若干態樣中,上述80℃tanδ 80可為0.50以下,亦可為0.35以下。 In some aspects, the 80°C tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.60 or less. By making the said tan δ 80 to be 0.60 or less, the plastic deformation of the adhesive can be suppressed, and good bending recovery properties can be easily obtained. In addition, even when the reinforcing film is kept in a bent state for a long time, it is easy to exhibit a holding force that does not peel off from the adherend. Further, the increase in adhesive force is also likely to be in a suitable range. The above-mentioned 80°C tanδ 80 may be 0.55 or less. In other aspects, the 80°C tanδ 80 may be 0.50 or less, or 0.35 or less.

黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23、80℃體積彈性模數G' 80及80℃tanδ 80可藉由聚合物(A)之種類或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度、分子結構等)、聚合物(B)之種類(化學結構等)或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度等)、使用量、交聯劑之種類或使用量等進行調節。黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23、80℃體積彈性模數G' 80及80℃tanδ 80係藉由下述實施例所記載之方法進行測定。 The 23°C bulk modulus G' 23 , 80°C bulk modulus G' 80 and 80°C tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer can be determined by the type or characteristics of the polymer (A) (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc. ), the type (chemical structure, etc.) or characteristics (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, etc.) of the polymer (B), the amount used, the type or amount of the crosslinking agent, etc. are adjusted. The 23°C bulk modulus G' 23 , 80°C bulk modulus G' 80 and 80°C tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer were measured by the methods described in the following examples.

(聚合物(A)) 作為聚合物(A),可使用黏著劑領域公知之丙烯酸系聚合物、橡膠系聚合物、聚酯系聚合物、胺基甲酸酯系聚合物、聚醚系聚合物、聚矽氧系聚合物、聚醯胺系聚合物、氟系聚合物等在室溫區域顯示橡膠彈性之各種聚合物之一種或兩種以上。此處所揭示之補強用膜中,聚合物(A)典型的是黏著劑層中所含之聚合物成分之主成分、即佔據超過50重量%之成分,例如可為上述聚合物成分中佔據75重量%以上之成分。於若干態樣中,上述聚合物(A)係佔據超過黏著劑層整體之50重量%之成分,可為佔據70重量%以上之成分,可為佔據80重量%以上之成分,可為佔據90重量%以上之成分,亦可為佔據95重量%以上(例如97重量%以上)之成分。 (Polymer (A)) As the polymer (A), acrylic polymers, rubber-based polymers, polyester-based polymers, urethane-based polymers, polyether-based polymers, and polysiloxane-based polymers known in the field of adhesives can be used One or two or more of various polymers that exhibit rubber elasticity in the room temperature region, such as polymers, polyamide-based polymers, and fluorine-based polymers. In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the polymer (A) is typically the main component of the polymer component contained in the adhesive layer, that is, the component that occupies more than 50% by weight, for example, it may occupy 75% of the above-mentioned polymer component. % by weight or more. In some aspects, the above-mentioned polymer (A) is a component that occupies more than 50% by weight of the entire adhesive layer, can be a component that occupies more than 70% by weight, can occupy more than 80% by weight, and can occupy 90% by weight. The component of 95 weight% or more (for example, 97 weight% or more) may be sufficient as the component of weight % or more.

聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A並無特別限定,可以於此處所揭示之補強用膜中獲得較佳特性之方式進行選擇。於若干態樣中,可良好地採用T A未達0℃之聚合物(A)。包含此種聚合物(A)之黏著劑由於顯示出適度之流動性(例如該黏著劑中所含之聚合物鏈之運動性),故適於實現藉由加熱使黏著力上升至規定值以上之補強用膜。此處所揭示之補強用膜可使用T A未達-10℃、未達-20℃、未達-30℃或未達-35℃之聚合物(A)良好地實施。於若干態樣中,T A可未達-40℃,亦可未達-50℃。於若干較佳態樣中,T A為-55℃以下,更佳為-58℃以下,進而較佳為-62℃以下,亦可為-65℃以下(例如-66℃以下)。T A之下限並無特別限制。就材料之獲取容易性或提高黏著劑層之凝聚力之觀點而言,通常可良好地採用T A為-80℃以上、-70℃以上之聚合物(A)。於若干態樣中,T A例如可為-63℃以上,可為-55℃以上,可為-50℃以上,亦可為-45℃以上。 The glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ) is not particularly limited, and can be selected so as to obtain preferable properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein. In several aspects, polymers ( A ) with a TA of less than 0°C may be used well. Since the adhesive containing such a polymer (A) exhibits moderate fluidity (for example, the mobility of the polymer chain contained in the adhesive), it is suitable for increasing the adhesive force to a predetermined value or more by heating The reinforcing film. The reinforcing films disclosed herein can perform well using polymers ( A ) whose TA is less than -10°C, less than -20°C, less than -30°C, or less than -35°C. In some aspects, TA may not reach -40°C or -50°C. In some preferred aspects, TA is below -55°C, more preferably below -58°C, further preferably below -62°C, and also below -65°C (eg below -66°C). The lower limit of T A is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of the availability of materials and the improvement of the cohesive force of the adhesive layer, a polymer (A) having a TA of -80°C or higher and -70°C or higher is usually preferably used. In some aspects, T A may be, for example, -63°C or higher, -55°C or higher, -50°C or higher, or -45°C or higher.

此處,本說明書中,聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)(例如聚合物(A)、下述聚合物(B)等之玻璃轉移溫度)係指文獻或目錄等所記載之標稱值、或基於用於製備該聚合物之單體原料之組成根據Fox之式所求出之Tg。Fox式係指如下所示,共聚物之Tg與使構成該共聚物之單體各者均聚所獲得之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度Tgi之關係式。 1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi) 於上述Fox之式中,Tg表示共聚物之玻璃轉移溫度(單位:K),Wi表示該共聚物中之單體i之重量分率(重量基準之共聚比率),Tgi表示單體i之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度(單位:K)。於Tg特定之對象聚合物為均聚物之情形時,該均聚物之Tg與對象聚合物之Tg一致。 Here, in this specification, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer (for example, the glass transition temperature of the polymer (A), the following polymer (B), etc.) refers to the nominal value described in the literature or catalogue, etc. Or the Tg determined according to Fox's formula based on the composition of the monomer raw materials used to prepare the polymer. Fox's formula means a relational formula between the Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of the homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below. 1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi) In the above formula of Fox, Tg represents the glass transition temperature of the copolymer (unit: K), Wi represents the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio on a weight basis), and Tgi represents the average of the monomer i. The glass transition temperature of the polymer (unit: K). When the target polymer whose Tg is specified is a homopolymer, the Tg of the homopolymer is the same as the Tg of the target polymer.

作為用於算出Tg之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度,使用公知資料所記載之值。具體而言,可例舉「聚合物手冊」(第3版,John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989年)中之數值。關於上述聚合物手冊中記載有複數種值之單體,採用最高值。As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer for calculating Tg, the value described in a known document was used. Specifically, the numerical value in "Polymer Handbook" (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989) can be exemplified. Regarding the monomers for which plural values are described in the above-mentioned polymer handbook, the highest value is used.

作為上述聚合物手冊中無記載之單體之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度,使用藉由以下測定方法所獲得之值。 具體而言,於具備溫度計、攪拌機、氮氣導入管及回流冷凝管之反應器中投入單體100重量份、2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈0.2重量份及作為聚合溶劑之乙酸乙酯200重量份,一面使氮氣流通一面攪拌1小時。於以此方式去除聚合系內之氧後,升溫至63℃,並使其反應10小時。繼而,冷卻至室溫,獲得固形物成分濃度33重量%之均聚物溶液。繼而,將該均聚物溶液流延塗佈於剝離襯墊上並進行乾燥而製作厚度約2 mm之試驗樣品(片狀之均聚物)。將該試驗樣品沖切為直徑7.9 mm之圓盤狀並夾入至平行板之間,一面使用黏彈性試驗機(TA Instruments Japan公司製造,機種名「ARES」)賦予頻率1 Hz之剪切應變,一面於溫度區域-70℃~150℃以5℃/分鐘之升溫速度藉由剪切模式測定黏彈性,將相當於tanδ之峰頂溫度之溫度設為均聚物之Tg。 The value obtained by the following measurement method was used as the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the monomer which is not described in the said polymer manual. Specifically, 100 parts by weight of monomers, 0.2 parts by weight of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, and ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent were put into a reactor equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a nitrogen introduction pipe, and a reflux condenser. 200 parts by weight was stirred for 1 hour while flowing nitrogen gas. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, the temperature was raised to 63° C., and the reaction was performed for 10 hours. Then, it cooled to room temperature, and obtained the homopolymer solution of 33 weight% of solid content concentration. Next, the homopolymer solution was cast-coated on a release liner and dried to prepare a test sample (a sheet-like homopolymer) having a thickness of about 2 mm. This test sample was punched out into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm and sandwiched between parallel plates, and a shear strain with a frequency of 1 Hz was applied using a viscoelasticity tester (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, model name "ARES"). , while measuring the viscoelasticity by shear mode at a heating rate of 5°C/min in a temperature range of -70°C to 150°C, and set the temperature corresponding to the peak top temperature of tanδ as the Tg of the homopolymer.

聚合物(A)之重量平均分子量(Mw)通常適宜為約20×10 4以上,但並無特別限定。藉由該Mw之聚合物(A),容易獲得顯示良好凝聚性之黏著劑。就獲得更高凝聚力之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(A)之Mw例如可為30×10 4以上,可為40×10 4以上,可為50×10 4以上,可為60×10 4以上,亦可為80×10 4以上。又,聚合物(A)之Mw通常適宜為約500×10 4以下。該Mw之聚合物(A)由於容易形成顯示適度流動性(聚合物鏈之運動性)之黏著劑,故適於實現貼附初期之黏著力較低且黏著力上升較大之補強用膜。聚合物(A)之Mw不過高就提高與聚合物(B)之相容性之觀點而言亦較佳。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(A)之Mw例如可為250×10 4以下,可為200×10 4以下,可為150×10 4以下,可為100×10 4以下,亦可為70×10 4以下。 The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (A) is usually preferably about 20×10 4 or more, but is not particularly limited. By the polymer (A) of this Mw, it is easy to obtain the adhesive which shows good cohesion. From the viewpoint of obtaining higher cohesion, in some preferred aspects, the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 30×10 4 or higher, 40×10 4 or higher, or 50×10 4 or higher, It may be 60×10 4 or more, or 80×10 4 or more. In addition, the Mw of the polymer (A) is usually preferably about 500×10 4 or less. Since the polymer (A) of Mw is easy to form an adhesive showing moderate fluidity (movability of polymer chains), it is suitable for realizing a reinforcing film with a low adhesive force in the initial stage of attachment and a large increase in the adhesive force. It is also preferable from the viewpoint of improving the compatibility with the polymer (B) that the Mw of the polymer (A) is not too high. In some preferred aspects, the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 250×10 4 or less, 200×10 4 or less, 150×10 4 or less, 100×10 4 or less, or is 70×10 4 or less.

再者,本說明書中,聚合物(A)及下述聚合物(B)之Mw可藉由凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)進行聚苯乙烯換算而求出。更具體而言,可依據下述實施例中所記載之方法及條件而測定Mw。In addition, in this specification, Mw of a polymer (A) and the following polymer (B) can be calculated|required by polystyrene conversion by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). More specifically, Mw can be measured according to the method and conditions described in the following examples.

作為此處所揭示之補強用膜中之聚合物(A),可良好地採用丙烯酸系聚合物。若使用丙烯酸系聚合物作為聚合物(A),則有容易獲得與聚合物(B)之良好之相容性之傾向。聚合物(A)與聚合物(B)之相容性良好時,可藉由提高黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性而有助於降低初期黏著力及提高加熱後黏著力,故較佳。又,分子設計自由度較高之丙烯酸系聚合物適宜作為可均衡地改善黏著特性、彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之黏著劑材料。As the polymer (A) in the reinforcing film disclosed herein, an acrylic polymer can be suitably used. When an acrylic polymer is used as a polymer (A), there exists a tendency for favorable compatibility with a polymer (B) to be easily obtained. When the compatibility between the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) is good, it can help to reduce the initial adhesion and improve the adhesion after heating by improving the mobility of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer. So better. In addition, acrylic polymers with a high degree of freedom in molecular design are suitable as adhesive materials that can improve adhesive properties, bending recovery and bending retention force in a balanced manner.

丙烯酸系聚合物例如可為含有50重量%以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之單體單元之聚合物、即用以製備該丙烯酸系聚合物之單體成分(單體原料A)總量中之50重量%以上為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之聚合物。作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可良好地使用具有碳數1~20之(即,C 1-20之)直鏈或支鏈狀之烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。就容易獲得特性之平衡之方面而言,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為50重量%以上,亦可為60重量%以上。於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率為70重量%以上,更佳為80重量%以上,進而較佳為85重量%以上,尤佳為90重量%以上。藉由使用該單體組成之丙烯酸系聚合物,容易獲得均衡地兼顧黏著力上升與彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之黏著劑。又,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為99.9重量%以下,可為98重量%以下,亦可為95重量%以下。於若干態樣中,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為90重量%以下,可為85重量%以下,亦可為80重量%以下。 The acrylic polymer may be, for example, a polymer containing 50% by weight or more of a monomer unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, that is, a monomer component (monomer raw material A) for preparing the acrylic polymer. 50% by weight or more of the total amount is a polymer of alkyl (meth)acrylate. As the alkyl (meth)acrylate, an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (ie, C 1-20 ) can be suitably used. The ratio of the C 1-20 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 50 wt % or more, or 60 wt % or more, in terms of easily obtaining a balance of properties. In some preferred aspects, the ratio of (meth)acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A is 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, and more preferably 85% by weight or more , particularly preferably 90% by weight or more. By using the acrylic polymer composed of the monomers, it is easy to obtain an adhesive that balances the rise in adhesive force, the resilience to bending, and the retention force for bending. Moreover, the ratio of the C 1-20 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9 wt % or less, 98 wt % or less, or 95 wt % or less. In some aspects, the ratio of C 1-20 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 90 wt % or less, 85 wt % or less, or 80 wt % or less.

作為(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之非限定具體例,可例舉:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十九烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二十烷基酯等。 Non-limiting specific examples of C 1-20 alkyl (meth)acrylates include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate ) Isopropyl acrylate, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, 2nd butyl (meth)acrylate, 3rd butyl (meth)acrylate, pentyl (meth)acrylate ester, isoamyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, octyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate ) Isooctyl acrylate, nonyl (meth)acrylate, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, isodecyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate , Dodecyl (meth)acrylate, tridecyl (meth)acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate, pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid cetyl ester, heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate, isostearyl (meth)acrylate, nonadecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate ) eicosyl acrylate, etc.

於該等中,較佳為至少使用(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-18烷基酯,更佳為至少使用(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-14烷基酯。於若干態樣中,丙烯酸系聚合物可含有選自(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-12烷基酯(較佳為丙烯酸C 4-10烷基酯,例如丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯)中之至少一種作為單體單元。例如較佳為含有丙烯酸正丁酯(BA)及丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)之一者或兩者之丙烯酸系聚合物,尤佳為至少含有2EHA之丙烯酸系聚合物。 Among these, it is preferable to use at least a C 1-18 alkyl (meth)acrylate, and it is more preferable to use at least a C 1-14 alkyl (meth)acrylate. In some aspects, the acrylic polymer may contain a C 4-12 alkyl (meth)acrylate (preferably a C 4-10 alkyl acrylate, such as a C 6-10 alkyl acrylate) At least one of them is used as a monomer unit. For example, an acrylic polymer containing one or both of n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) is preferable, and an acrylic polymer containing at least 2EHA is particularly preferable.

於若干較佳態樣中,用以製備丙烯酸系聚合物之單體原料A中之丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯(適宜為丙烯酸C 8-9烷基酯,典型的是2EHA)之比率為70重量%以上,更佳為80重量%以上,進而較佳為85重量%以上,尤佳為90重量%以上。該單體組成之丙烯酸系聚合物尤其適宜實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。又,單體原料A中之丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯(適宜為丙烯酸C 8-9烷基酯,典型的是2EHA)之比率例如可為99.9重量%以下,就初期低黏著力、彎曲回復性等觀點而言,可為98重量%以下,亦可為95重量%以下。 In some preferred aspects, the ratio of C 6-10 alkyl acrylate (suitably C 8-9 alkyl acrylate, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A used to prepare the acrylic polymer is: 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, still more preferably 85% by weight or more, particularly preferably 90% by weight or more. Acrylic polymers of this monomer composition are particularly suitable for achieving the effects of the techniques disclosed herein. In addition, the ratio of C 6-10 alkyl acrylate (suitably C 8-9 alkyl acrylate, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9 wt % or less, resulting in low initial adhesion and bending. From the viewpoint of recovery properties, it may be 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less.

又,於若干較佳態樣中,用以製備丙烯酸系聚合物之單體原料A中,較佳為限制(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是甲基丙烯酸甲酯(MMA))之比率。(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是MMA)有Tg相對較高之傾向,包含使用上述單體成分之丙烯酸系聚合物的黏著劑之凝聚性容易變高。藉由限制(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯之使用量,可適度降低黏著劑之凝聚力,良好地實現適於兼顧彎曲保持力或黏著力上升之彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)。就此種觀點而言,上述單體原料A中(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是MMA)之比率適宜設為8重量%以下,較佳為6重量%以下,更佳為3重量%以下,進而較佳為1重量%以下(例如0~0.3重量%)。 In addition, in some preferred aspects, in the monomer raw material A used to prepare the acrylic polymer, it is preferable to limit the C 1-3 alkyl (meth)acrylate (such as C 1 -alkane (meth)acrylate) base ester, typically methyl methacrylate (MMA)). C 1-3 alkyl (meth)acrylates (such as C 1 alkyl (meth)acrylates, typically MMA) tend to have relatively high Tg, and those containing acrylic polymers using the above-mentioned monomer components The cohesiveness of the adhesive tends to become high. By limiting the amount of C 1-3 alkyl (meth)acrylate used, the cohesive force of the adhesive can be moderately reduced, and the elastic modulus (typically surface elasticity) suitable for taking into account the bending retention force or the increase in adhesive force can be well achieved. modulus). From this point of view, the ratio of C 1-3 alkyl (meth)acrylate (for example, C 1 alkyl (meth)acrylate, typically MMA) in the above-mentioned monomer raw material A is preferably 8% by weight Hereinafter, it is preferably 6 wt % or less, more preferably 3 wt % or less, and still more preferably 1 wt % or less (for example, 0 to 0.3 wt %).

單體原料A亦可包含作為主成分之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯並且視需要包含能夠與(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯進行共聚之其他單體(共聚性單體)。作為共聚性單體,可良好地使用具有極性基(例如羧基、羥基、含氮原子之環等)之單體。具有極性基之單體可有助於對丙烯酸系聚合物導入交聯點或提高丙烯酸系聚合物之凝聚力。共聚性單體可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。The monomer raw material A may contain the (meth)acrylic-acid alkylester as a main component, and may contain other monomer (copolymerizable monomer) which can be copolymerized with the (meth)acrylic-acid alkylester as needed. As a copolymerizable monomer, a monomer having a polar group (for example, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a nitrogen atom-containing ring, etc.) can be preferably used. Monomers with polar groups can help introduce cross-linking points to the acrylic polymer or improve the cohesion of the acrylic polymer. A comonomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.

作為共聚性單體之非限定具體例,可例舉以下者。 含羥基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸6-羥基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸8-羥基辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸10-羥基癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸12-羥基月桂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸(4-羥基甲基環己基)甲酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷基酯等。 具有含氮原子之環之單體:例如N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-甲基乙烯基吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基吡啶、N-乙烯基哌啶酮、N-乙烯基嘧啶、N-乙烯基哌𠯤、N-乙烯基吡𠯤、N-乙烯基吡咯、N-乙烯基咪唑、N-乙烯基㗁唑、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基哌啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基吡咯啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基𠰌啉、N-乙烯基𠰌啉、N-乙烯基-3-𠰌啉酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺、N-乙烯基-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-酮、N-乙烯基-3,5-𠰌啉二酮、N-乙烯基吡唑、N-乙烯基異㗁唑、N-乙烯基噻唑、N-乙烯基異噻唑、N-乙烯基嗒𠯤等; 例如N-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基亞甲基丁二醯亞胺、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-6-氧基六亞甲基丁二醯亞胺、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-8-氧基六亞甲基丁二醯亞胺等具有丁二醯亞胺骨架之單體; 例如N-環己基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-異丙基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-月桂基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-苯基順丁烯二醯亞胺等順丁烯二醯亞胺類;及 例如N-甲基伊康醯亞胺、N-乙基伊康醯亞胺、N-丁基伊康醯亞胺、N-辛基伊康醯亞胺、N-2-乙基己基伊康醯亞胺、N-環己基伊康醯亞胺、N-月桂基伊康醯亞胺等伊康醯亞胺類。 含羧基單體:例如丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、丙烯酸羧基乙酯、丙烯酸羧基戊酯、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸、反丁烯二酸、丁烯酸、異丁烯酸等。 含酸酐基單體:例如順丁烯二酸酐、伊康酸酐。 含環氧基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯或(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基縮水甘油醚等含環氧基之丙烯酸酯、烯丙基縮水甘油醚、(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油醚等。 含氰基單體:例如丙烯腈、甲基丙烯腈等。 含異氰酸基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-異氰酸基乙酯等。 含醯胺基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N,N-二甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二異丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二(正丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二(第三丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N,N-二烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N-乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-異丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-丁基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-正丁基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N-乙烯基乙醯胺等N-乙烯基羧醯胺類;具有羥基與醯胺基之單體,例如N-(2-羥基乙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(2-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(1-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(3-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(2-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(3-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(4-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-羥基烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;具有烷氧基與醯胺基之單體,例如N-甲氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-甲氧基乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-丁氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-烷氧基烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;此外,N,N-二甲基胺基丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等。 (甲基)丙烯酸胺基烷基酯類:例如(甲基)丙烯酸胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二乙基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁基胺基乙酯。 含烷氧基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-甲氧基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丁氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基丙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基烷基酯類;(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙二醇酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基聚丙二醇酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基伸烷基二醇酯類。 含有磺酸基或磷酸基之單體:例如苯乙烯磺酸、烯丙基磺酸、乙烯基磺酸鈉、2-(甲基)丙烯醯胺-2-甲基丙磺酸、(甲基)丙烯醯胺丙磺酸、(甲基)丙烯酸磺丙酯、(甲基)丙烯醯氧基萘磺酸、2-羥基乙基丙烯醯基磷酸酯等。 具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯:例如(甲基)丙烯酸環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異𦯉酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等。 具有芳香族烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯:例如(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等。 乙烯醚類:例如甲基乙烯醚或乙基乙烯醚等乙烯基烷基醚。 乙烯酯類:例如乙酸乙烯酯、丙酸乙烯酯等。 芳香族乙烯基化合物:例如苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯等。 烯烴類:例如乙烯、丁二烯、異戊二烯、異丁烯等。 此外,(甲基)丙烯酸四氫呋喃甲酯等含雜環之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、氯乙烯或含氟原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等含鹵素原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚矽氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等含矽原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、由萜烯化合物衍生物醇所獲得之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 Non-limiting specific examples of the copolymerizable monomer include the following. Hydroxyl-containing monomers: such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, 12 (meth)acrylate -Hydroxylauryl ester, (meth)acrylic acid (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl) methyl ester, etc. (meth)acrylic acid hydroxyalkyl ester, etc. Monomers with rings containing nitrogen atoms: e.g. N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinyl Pyrimidine, N-vinylpiperidine, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpyrrole, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazole, N-(meth)acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone , N-(meth)acryloylpiperidine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidine, N-vinylpyridinium, N-vinyl-3 -𠰌olinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, N-vinyl-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-𠰌linedione, N-ethylene Pyrazole, N-vinylisoxazole, N-vinylthiazole, N-vinylisothiazole, N-vinylisothiazole, etc.; For example, N-(meth)acryloyloxymethylenesuccinimide, N-(meth)acryloyl-6-oxyhexamethylenesuccinimide, N-(methyl) Acryloyl-8-oxyhexamethylene succinimide and other monomers with succinimide skeleton; For example, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-isopropylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide, etc. maleimides; and For example N-methyliconimide, N-ethyliconimide, N-butyliconimide, N-octyliconimide, N-2-ethylhexyliconimide Iconimide such as imide, N-cyclohexyl iconimide, N-lauryl iconimide, etc. Carboxyl group-containing monomers: for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, carboxyethyl acrylate, carboxypentyl acrylate, itonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, methacrylic acid, and the like. Acid anhydride group-containing monomers: such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride. Epoxy group-containing monomers: such as epoxy group-containing acrylates such as glycidyl (meth)acrylate or (meth)acrylate-2-ethyl glycidyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, (methyl) Acrylic Glycidyl Ether, etc. Cyano group-containing monomers: such as acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, etc. Isocyanate group-containing monomer: for example, 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Amide group-containing monomers: such as (meth)acrylamide; N,N-dimethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N- Dipropyl (meth) acrylamide, N,N-diisopropyl (meth) acrylamide, N,N-di (n-butyl) (meth) acrylamide, N,N-di (Tertiary butyl) (meth) acrylamide, etc. N,N-dialkyl (meth) acrylamide; N-ethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-isopropyl (methyl) Acrylamide, N-butyl (meth) acrylamide, N-n-butyl (meth) acrylamide, etc. N-alkyl (meth) acrylamide; N-vinylacetamide, etc. N -Vinyl carboxamides; monomers with hydroxyl and amide groups, such as N-(2-hydroxyethyl)(meth)acrylamide, N-(2-hydroxypropyl)(meth)propylene Amide, N-(1-hydroxypropyl)(meth)acrylamide, N-(3-hydroxypropyl)(meth)acrylamide, N-(2-hydroxybutyl)(methyl) N-Hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides such as acrylamide, N-(3-hydroxybutyl)(meth)acrylamide, and N-(4-hydroxybutyl)(meth)acrylamide ; Monomers with alkoxy and amide groups, such as N-methoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl N-alkoxyalkyl(meth)acrylamides such as alkoxy(meth)acrylamides; in addition, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl(meth)acrylamides and the like. Aminoalkyl (meth)acrylates: such as aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-di(meth)acrylate Ethylaminoethyl ester, tert-butylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate. Alkoxy-containing monomers: such as 2-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-methoxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, (methyl)acrylate ) Propoxyethyl acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, ethoxypropyl (meth)acrylate and other (meth)acrylate alkoxyalkyl esters; (meth)acrylate methoxy (meth)acrylic acid alkoxyalkylene glycol esters, such as ethylene glycol ester and methoxypolypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate. Monomers containing sulfonic acid groups or phosphoric acid groups: such as styrene sulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, sodium vinyl sulfonate, 2-(meth)acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, (methyl) ) acrylamide propanesulfonic acid, sulfopropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acryloyloxynaphthalenesulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethylacryloylphosphate, and the like. (Meth)acrylates with alicyclic hydrocarbon groups: such as cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, isoflurane (meth)acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate Wait. (Meth)acrylate having an aromatic hydrocarbon group: for example, phenyl (meth)acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, and the like. Vinyl ethers: vinyl alkyl ethers such as methyl vinyl ether or ethyl vinyl ether. Vinyl esters: such as vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, etc. Aromatic vinyl compounds: for example, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, and the like. Olefins: such as ethylene, butadiene, isoprene, isobutylene, etc. In addition, (meth)acrylates containing heterocycles such as tetrahydrofuran methyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylates containing halogen atoms such as vinyl chloride or (meth)acrylates containing fluorine atoms, polysiloxanes, etc. Silicon atom-containing (meth)acrylates such as (meth)acrylates, (meth)acrylates obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohols, and the like.

於使用此種共聚性單體之情形時,其使用量並無特別限定,通常適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上。就更良好地發揮由使用共聚性單體所產生之效果之觀點而言,可將共聚性單體之使用量設為單體原料A之0.1重量%以上,亦可設為1重量%以上。於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A中之共聚性單體之含量為3重量%以上,更佳為5重量%以上,進而較佳為7重量%以上(例如8重量%以上)。呈現共聚性單體之使用量越多,則凝聚性越高,彎曲回復性越高之傾向。又,共聚性單體之使用量可設為單體原料A之50重量%以下,較佳為設為30重量%以下。藉此,可防止黏著劑之凝聚力變得過高,提高常溫(25℃)下之黏著感。於若干較佳態樣中,共聚性單體之使用量係單體原料A之20重量%以下,更佳為15重量%以下(例如12重量%以下),亦可為10重量%以下。藉由限制共聚性單體之使用量,黏著劑之凝聚力降低,彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)成為適宜範圍,容易獲得優異之彎曲保持力,容易實現黏著力上升。When using such a copolymerizable monomer, the usage-amount is not specifically limited, Usually, it is suitable to be 0.01 weight% or more of the monomer raw material A. The usage-amount of a comonomer can be 0.1 weight% or more of the monomer raw material A from a viewpoint of exhibiting the effect by using a copolymerizable monomer more favorably, and 1 weight% or more may be sufficient as it. In some preferred aspects, the content of the comonomer in the monomer raw material A is 3 wt % or more, more preferably 5 wt % or more, and still more preferably 7 wt % or more (eg, 8 wt % or more). The higher the amount of the comonomer used, the higher the cohesiveness and the higher the bending recovery. Moreover, the usage-amount of a copolymerizable monomer can be 50 weight% or less of the monomer raw material A, Preferably it is 30 weight% or less. Thereby, the cohesive force of the adhesive can be prevented from becoming too high, and the stickiness at normal temperature (25°C) can be improved. In some preferred aspects, the amount of the comonomer used is 20 wt % or less of the monomer raw material A, more preferably 15 wt % or less (eg, 12 wt % or less), and may also be 10 wt % or less. By limiting the amount of comonomer used, the cohesive force of the adhesive is reduced, and the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) is in an appropriate range, and it is easy to obtain excellent bending retention force and increase the adhesion force.

於若干態樣中,單體原料A可包含具有含氮原子之環之單體。藉由使用具有含氮原子之環之單體,可調整黏著劑之凝聚力或極性,適宜地提高加熱後黏著力。藉由使單體原料A中包含具有含氮原子之環之單體,有由上述單體原料A形成之聚合物(A)與上述聚合物(B)之相容性提高之傾向。藉此,容易獲得能以加熱使黏著力大幅地上升之補強用膜。In several aspects, monomer feed A may comprise a monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring. By using a monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring, the cohesion or polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, and the adhesive force after heating can be appropriately improved. By including the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A, the compatibility of the polymer (A) formed from the monomer raw material A and the polymer (B) tends to improve. Thereby, it becomes easy to obtain the reinforcement film which can raise the adhesive force significantly by heating.

具有含氮原子之環之單體例如可自上述例示中適當選擇,單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。於若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為含有選自由N-乙烯基環狀醯胺、及具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺所組成之群中之至少一種單體作為具有含氮原子之環之單體。The monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring can be appropriately selected from, for example, the above-mentioned examples, and can be used alone or in combination of two or more. In some aspects, the monomer raw material A preferably contains at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of N-vinyl cyclic amides and cyclic amides having (meth)acryloyl groups as Monomers with rings containing nitrogen atoms.

作為N-乙烯基環狀醯胺之具體例,可例舉:N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基-2-哌啶酮、N-乙烯基-3-𠰌啉酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺、N-乙烯基-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-酮、N-乙烯基-3,5-𠰌啉二酮等。尤佳為N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺。 作為具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺之具體例,可例舉:N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基哌啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基吡咯啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基𠰌啉等。作為較佳例,可例舉N-丙烯醯基𠰌啉(ACMO)。 Specific examples of N-vinyl cyclic amides include N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone, N-vinyl-3-piperidinone, N-Vinyl-2-caprolactam, N-vinyl-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-𠰌linedione, etc. Particularly preferred are N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactam. Specific examples of the cyclic amide having a (meth)acryloyl group include N-(meth)acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-(meth)acrylopiperidine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidine, and the like. As a preferable example, N-acryloyl molybdenum (ACMO) can be mentioned.

具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量並無特別限制,通常適宜設為單體原料A之40重量%以下,可設為30重量%以下,可設為20重量%以下,亦可設為10重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,就降低凝聚力而降低彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)之觀點而言,單體原料A中,具有含氮原子之環之單體之含量為7重量%以下,更佳為5重量%以下,進而較佳為3重量%以下(例如1.5重量%以下)。又,具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量通常適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上(較佳為0.1重量%以上,例如0.5重量%以上)。就獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量可設為單體原料A之0.8重量%以上,亦可設為1.0重量%以上。The amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring to be used is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 40 wt % or less of the monomer raw material A, may be 30 wt % or less, may be 20 wt % or less, or may be It is 10 weight% or less. In some preferred aspects, the content of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A is 7 wt. % or less, more preferably 5 wt % or less, still more preferably 3 wt % or less (for example, 1.5 wt % or less). Moreover, the usage-amount of the monomer which has a nitrogen atom containing ring is normally 0.01 weight% or more of monomer raw material A (preferably 0.1 weight% or more, for example, 0.5 weight% or more). From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate cohesion force and elastic modulus, in some aspects, the use amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring may be 0.8% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, and may also be 1.0% by weight. % by weight or more.

於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A包含含羥基單體。藉由使用含羥基單體,可調整黏著劑之凝聚力或極性、進而調整彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數),良好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。又,含羥基單體提供與下述交聯劑(例如異氰酸酯系交聯劑)之反應點,可藉由交聯反應而提高黏著劑之凝聚力。In some preferred aspects, the monomer raw material A comprises a hydroxyl-containing monomer. By using hydroxyl-containing monomers, the cohesion or polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, and thus the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus) can be adjusted, and the effects of the techniques disclosed herein can be well achieved. In addition, the hydroxyl-containing monomer provides a reaction point with the following cross-linking agent (eg, an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent), which can improve the cohesion of the adhesive through the cross-linking reaction.

作為含羥基單體,可適宜地使用(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸6-羥基己酯、N-(2-羥基乙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等。其中,作為較佳例,可例舉丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(HEA)、丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯(4HBA)、N-(2-羥基乙基)丙烯醯胺(HEAA)。就獲得適於彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之凝聚力之觀點而言,尤佳為4HBA。As the hydroxyl group-containing monomer, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, N-(2-hydroxyethyl) can be suitably used group) (meth)acrylamide, etc. Among these, as a preferable example, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA), 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl) acrylamide (HEAA) are mentioned. From the viewpoint of obtaining a cohesive force suitable for bending recovery and bending retention, 4HBA is particularly preferred.

含羥基單體之使用量並無特別限制,通常適宜設為單體原料A之40重量%以下,可設為30重量%以下,亦可設為20重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,就降低凝聚力、進而降低彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)之觀點而言,單體原料A中含羥基單體之含量為15重量%以下,更佳為12重量%以下(例如10重量%以下)。藉由限制含羥基單體之使用量,聚合物(B)於黏著劑層內之移動性提高,容易實現黏著力上升。於其他若干態樣中,含羥基單體之含量亦可設為單體原料A之5重量%以下。又,含羥基單體之使用量適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上(較佳為0.1重量%以上、例如0.5重量%以上)。就獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,含羥基單體之使用量為單體原料A之1重量%以上,更佳為3重量%以上,進而較佳為5重量%以上,尤佳為7重量%以上(例如8重量%以上)。The usage-amount of a hydroxyl-containing monomer is not specifically limited, Usually, it is suitable to be 40 weight% or less of the monomer raw material A, and may be 30 weight% or less, and may be 20 weight% or less. In some preferred aspects, from the viewpoint of reducing the cohesion force and thus reducing the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus), the content of the hydroxyl-containing monomer in the monomer raw material A is 15% by weight or less, more preferably It is 12 weight% or less (for example, 10 weight% or less). By limiting the use amount of the hydroxyl-containing monomer, the mobility of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is improved, and the adhesive force is easily improved. In some other aspects, the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can also be set to 5 wt % or less of the monomer raw material A. Moreover, the usage-amount of a hydroxyl-containing monomer is suitably 0.01 weight% or more of monomer raw material A (preferably 0.1 weight% or more, for example, 0.5 weight% or more). From the viewpoint of obtaining a moderate cohesion force and elastic modulus, in some preferred aspects, the amount of the hydroxyl-containing monomer used is 1% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, more preferably 3% by weight or more, and more Preferably it is 5 weight% or more, Especially preferably, it is 7 weight% or more (for example, 8 weight% or more).

於若干態樣中,作為共聚性單體,可併用具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體。於該情形時,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量例如可設為單體原料A之0.1重量%以上,較佳為1重量%以上,更佳為3重量%以上,進而較佳為5重量%以上,尤佳為7重量%以上(例如9重量%以上),可設為10重量%以上,可設為15重量%以上,可設為20重量%以上,亦可設為25重量%以上。又,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量例如可設為單體原料A之50重量%以下,較佳為30重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量為單體原料A之20重量%以下,更佳為15重量%以下(例如12重量%以下)。In some aspects, as a copolymerizable monomer, a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and a hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be used in combination. In this case, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 0.1% by weight or more, preferably 1% by weight or more, and more preferably 3% by weight of the monomer raw material A. above, more preferably 5 wt % or more, particularly preferably 7 wt % or more (for example, 9 wt % or more), 10 wt % or more, 15 wt % or more, 20 wt % or more, You may make it 25 weight% or more. In addition, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 50% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, or preferably 30% by weight or less. In some preferred aspects, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is 20 wt% or less of the monomer raw material A, more preferably 15 wt% or less (for example, 12 wt% or less) .

於單體原料A組合包含具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之態樣中,該單體原料A中之具有含氮原子之環之單體之含量(W N)與含羥基單體之含量(W OH)之關係(重量基準)並無特別限定。W N/W OH例如可為0.01以上,通常適宜為0.05以上,可為0.10以上,亦可為0.12以上。又,W N/W OH例如可為10以下,通常適宜為1以下,較佳為0.50以下,可為0.30以下,可為0.20以下,亦可為0.15以下。 In the aspect in which the monomer raw material A combines a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, the content (W N ) of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A and the The relationship (weight basis) of the hydroxyl monomer content (W OH ) is not particularly limited. W N /W OH may be, for example, 0.01 or more, usually preferably 0.05 or more, 0.10 or more, or 0.12 or more. Moreover, W N /W OH may be, for example, 10 or less, usually 1 or less, preferably 0.50 or less, 0.30 or less, 0.20 or less, or 0.15 or less.

於若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為不含可良好地用作下述單體原料B之構成成分的具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體(單體S1),或該單體之含量未達單體原料A之10重量%(更佳為未達5重量%、例如未達2重量%)。藉由此種組成之單體原料A,可良好地實現良好地兼顧初期之二次加工性與黏著力上升後之強黏著性的補強用膜。就相同之原因而言,於其他若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為不含單體S1,或於含有單體S1之情形時其含量(重量基準)低於單體原料B中之單體S1之含量。In some aspects, the monomer raw material A preferably does not contain a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (monomer S1) that can be used well as a constituent of the monomer raw material B described below, or the monomer The content of the monomer material A is less than 10% by weight (more preferably less than 5% by weight, for example, less than 2% by weight). With the monomer raw material A having such a composition, a reinforcing film that satisfies both the secondary processability in the initial stage and the strong adhesiveness after the adhesive force is raised can be well realized. For the same reason, in some other aspects, the monomer raw material A preferably does not contain the monomer S1, or when the monomer S1 is contained, its content (weight basis) is lower than that in the monomer raw material B. The content of monomer S1.

獲得聚合物(A)之方法並無特別限定,例如可適當採用溶液聚合法、乳化聚合法、塊體聚合法、懸濁聚合法、光聚合法等各種聚合方法。於若干態樣中,可良好地採用溶液聚合法。進行溶液聚合時之聚合溫度可根據所使用之單體及溶劑之種類、聚合起始劑之種類等而適當選擇,例如可設為20℃~170℃左右(典型為40℃~140℃左右)。The method for obtaining the polymer (A) is not particularly limited, and various polymerization methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization can be appropriately employed, for example. In several aspects, solution polymerization methods may well be employed. The polymerization temperature during solution polymerization can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, the type of polymerization initiator, etc., for example, it can be set to about 20°C to 170°C (typically about 40°C to 140°C) .

用於聚合之起始劑可根據聚合方法而自先前公知之熱聚合起始劑或光聚合起始劑等中適當選擇。聚合起始劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。The initiator used for the polymerization can be appropriately selected from previously known thermal polymerization initiators, photopolymerization initiators, and the like according to the polymerization method. The polymerization initiators may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為熱聚合起始劑,例如可例舉:偶氮系聚合起始劑(例如2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈、2,2'-偶氮雙-2-甲基丁腈、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-甲基丙酸)二甲酯、4,4'-偶氮雙-4-氰基戊酸、偶氮二異戊腈、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-脒基丙烷)二鹽酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙[2-(5-甲基-2-咪唑啉-2-基)丙烷]二鹽酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-甲基丙脒)二硫酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙(N,N'-二亞甲基異丁基脒)二鹽酸鹽等);過硫酸鉀等過硫酸鹽;過氧化物系聚合起始劑(例如過氧化二苯甲醯、過氧化順丁烯二酸第三丁酯、過氧化月桂醯等);氧化還原系聚合起始劑等。熱聚合起始劑之使用量並無特別限制,例如相對於丙烯酸系聚合物之製備所使用之單體成分(單體原料A)100重量份,可設為0.01重量份~5重量份、較佳為0.05重量份~3重量份之範圍內之量。As the thermal polymerization initiator, for example, azo-based polymerization initiators (for example, 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, ,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionic acid) dimethyl ester, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanovaleric acid, azobisisovaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (2-Amidinopropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis[2-(5-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)propane]dihydrochloride, 2,2'- Azobis(2-methylpropionamidine)disulfate, 2,2'-azobis(N,N'-dimethylisobutylamidine)dihydrochloride, etc.); potassium persulfate, etc. Sulfate; peroxide-based polymerization initiators (for example, dibenzyl peroxide, 3-butyl peroxymaleate, lauryl peroxide, etc.); redox-based polymerization initiators, etc. The usage amount of the thermal polymerization initiator is not particularly limited, for example, relative to 100 parts by weight of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) used in the preparation of the acrylic polymer, it can be set as 0.01 part by weight to 5 parts by weight, or 100 parts by weight. The amount within the range of 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight is preferable.

作為光聚合起始劑,並無特別限制,例如可使用安息香醚系光聚合起始劑、苯乙酮系光聚合起始劑、α-酮醇系光聚合起始劑、芳香族磺醯氯系光聚合起始劑、光活性肟系光聚合起始劑、安息香系光聚合起始劑、苯偶醯系光聚合起始劑、二苯甲酮系光聚合起始劑、縮酮系光聚合起始劑、9-氧硫𠮿

Figure 110128733-0000-3
系光聚合起始劑、醯基氧化膦系光聚合起始劑等。光聚合起始劑之使用量並無特別限制,例如相對於100重量份單體原料A,可設為0.01重量份~5重量份、較佳為0.05重量份~3重量份之範圍內之量。The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and for example, a benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiator, an acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-ketol-based photopolymerization initiator, and an aromatic sulfonic acid chloride can be used. Photopolymerization initiators, photoactive oxime-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, ketal-based photopolymerization initiators Polymerization initiator, 9-oxysulfur 𠮿
Figure 110128733-0000-3
It is a photopolymerization initiator, an acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator, and the like. The usage amount of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, for example, it can be set in the range of 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.05 to 3 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the monomer raw material A .

於若干態樣中,聚合物(A)可以對在如上所述之單體原料A中調配聚合起始劑所得之混合物照射紫外線(UV)而使該單體成分之一部分聚合之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)之形態含有於用以形成黏著劑層之黏著劑組合物中。可將含有該聚合物漿液之黏著劑組合物塗佈於規定之被塗佈體,照射紫外線而使聚合完成。即,上述聚合物漿液可理解為聚合物(A)之前驅物。此處所揭示之黏著劑層例如可使用含有上述聚合物漿液與聚合物(B)之黏著劑組合物而形成。In some aspects, the polymer (A) may be a partial polymer (a partial polymer ( The form of polymer slurry) is contained in the adhesive composition for forming the adhesive layer. The adhesive composition containing the polymer slurry can be applied to a predetermined object to be coated and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays to complete the polymerization. That is, the said polymer slurry can be understood as a polymer (A) precursor. The adhesive layer disclosed here can be formed using, for example, an adhesive composition containing the above-mentioned polymer slurry and the polymer (B).

(聚合物(B)) 此處所揭示之技術中之聚合物(B)係包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體(以下,亦稱為「單體S1」)與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體成分(單體原料B)之聚合物。聚合物(B)可稱為單體S1與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之共聚物。聚合物(B)可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。聚合物(B)藉由源於單體S1之聚有機矽氧烷結構之低極性及運動性,可作為抑制貼附於被黏著體之初期之黏著力且藉由加熱會使對被黏著體之黏著力上升的黏著力上升延遲劑發揮功能。作為單體S1,並無特別限定,可使用含有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之任意單體。單體S1藉由源於其結構之低極性,而於使用前(貼附於被黏著體之前)之補強用膜中促進聚合物(B)偏靠於黏著劑層表面,表現出貼合初期之輕剝離性(低黏著性)。單體S1可良好地使用單末端具有聚合性反應基之結構者。藉由包含此種單體S1單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元之構成,形成側鏈具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之聚合物(B)。該結構之聚合物(B)藉由側鏈之運動性及移動容易性而容易成為初期黏著力較低且加熱後黏著力較高者。又,於若干態樣中,單體S1可良好地採用一末端具有聚合性反應基且另一末端不具有與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基者。使此種結構之單體S1共聚而成之聚合物(B)藉由源於單體S1之聚有機矽氧烷結構之運動性而容易成為初期黏著力較低且加熱後黏著力較高者。 (Polymer (B)) The polymer (B) in the technology disclosed herein contains a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (hereinafter, also referred to as "monomer S1") and a monomer component of a (meth)acrylic monomer ( Polymers of monomeric starting materials B). The polymer (B) can be referred to as a copolymer of the monomer S1 and a (meth)acrylic monomer. The polymer (B) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The low polarity and mobility of the polymer (B) derived from the polyorganosiloxane structure of the monomer S1 can be used to suppress the initial adhesion force to the adherend, and by heating, the The adhesive force increase delay agent that increases the adhesive force functions. It does not specifically limit as monomer S1, Any monomer containing a polyorganosiloxane skeleton can be used. Monomer S1 promotes the polymer (B) to lean on the surface of the adhesive layer in the reinforcing film before use (before it is attached to the adherend) due to its low polarity due to its structure, showing the initial stage of lamination. Light peeling (low tack). As the monomer S1, a structure having a polymerizable reactive group at one end can be suitably used. The polymer (B) which has a polyorganosiloxane skeleton in a side chain is formed by the structure containing such a monomer S1 unit and a (meth)acrylic-type monomer unit. The polymer (B) of this structure tends to have lower initial adhesion and higher adhesion after heating due to the mobility and ease of movement of the side chains. In addition, in some aspects, monomer S1 can be preferably used with a polymerizable reactive group at one end and no functional group at the other end that causes a crosslinking reaction with the polymer (A). The polymer (B) obtained by copolymerizing the monomer S1 of this structure is likely to have lower initial adhesion and higher adhesion after heating due to the mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from monomer S1 .

作為單體S1,例如可使用下述通式(1)或(2)所表示之化合物。更具體而言,作為信越化學工業公司製造之單末端反應性聚矽氧油,可例舉X-22-174ASX、X-22-2426、X-22-2475、KF-2012等。單體S1可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 [化1]

Figure 02_image001
[化2]
Figure 02_image003
此處,上述通式(1)、(2)中之R 3為氫或甲基,R 4為甲基或1價有機基,m及n為0以上之整數。 As the monomer S1, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can be used. More specifically, X-22-174ASX, X-22-2426, X-22-2475, KF-2012 etc. are mentioned as a single terminal reactive polysiloxane oil manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. Monomer S1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more. [hua 1]
Figure 02_image001
[hua 2]
Figure 02_image003
Here, in the general formulae (1) and (2), R 3 is hydrogen or a methyl group, R 4 is a methyl group or a monovalent organic group, and m and n are integers of 0 or more.

單體S1之官能基當量可於使用該單體S1發揮所期望之效果之範圍內採用適當值,並不限定於特定範圍。就充分抑制初期黏著力之觀點而言,上述官能基當量例如為100 g/mol以上、或200 g/mol以上,適宜為300 g/mol以上(例如500 g/mol以上),較佳為800 g/mol以上,更佳為1500 g/mol以上。於特佳態樣中,就兼顧貼附初期之低黏著性與加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,上述官能基當量為2000 g/mol以上,進而尤佳為2500 g/mol以上,可為3000 g/mol以上,可為4000 g/mol以上,亦可為5000 g/mol以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述官能基當量可為9000 g/mol以上,可為12000 g/mol以上,亦可為15000 g/mol以上。The functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can adopt an appropriate value within the range in which the desired effect is obtained by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing the initial adhesion, the functional group equivalent is, for example, 100 g/mol or more, or 200 g/mol or more, preferably 300 g/mol or more (for example, 500 g/mol or more), preferably 800. g/mol or more, more preferably 1500 g/mol or more. In a particularly preferred aspect, from the viewpoint of both the low adhesiveness at the initial stage of attachment and the increase in the adhesive force after heating, the functional group equivalent is 2000 g/mol or more, more preferably 2500 g/mol or more, and can be used. It is 3000 g/mol or more, may be 4000 g/mol or more, and may be 5000 g/mol or more. In other aspects, the functional group equivalent may be above 9000 g/mol, above 12000 g/mol, or above 15000 g/mol.

就充分提昇黏著力之觀點而言,上述官能基當量例如適宜為30000 g/mol以下,可為20000 g/mol以下,可未達15000 g/mol,亦可未達10000 g/mol。於若干較佳態樣中,單體S1之官能基當量為7000 g/mol以下,更佳為5500 g/mol以下,進而較佳為4500 g/mol以下,可為4200 g/mol以下,亦可為3500 g/mol以下。若單體S1之官能基當量在上述範圍內,則黏著劑層內之相容性(例如與基礎聚合物之相容性)易變得良好,又,聚合物(B)之聚有機矽氧烷骨架(鏈)之運動性良好,進而容易將聚合物(B)之移動性調節為適度範圍,容易實現兼顧初期低黏著性與加熱後黏著力上升之黏著劑層。From the viewpoint of sufficiently improving the adhesive force, the functional group equivalent weight is preferably, for example, 30,000 g/mol or less, may be 20,000 g/mol or less, may be less than 15,000 g/mol, or may be less than 10,000 g/mol. In some preferred aspects, the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 is 7000 g/mol or less, more preferably 5500 g/mol or less, further preferably 4500 g/mol or less, may be 4200 g/mol or less, or It can be below 3500 g/mol. If the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 is within the above range, the compatibility in the adhesive layer (for example, the compatibility with the base polymer) tends to be good, and the polyorganosiloxane of the polymer (B) The mobility of the alkane skeleton (chain) is good, and it is easy to adjust the mobility of the polymer (B) to an appropriate range, and it is easy to realize an adhesive layer that combines low initial adhesion and increased adhesion after heating.

此處,「官能基當量」係指鍵結於每1個官能基之主骨架(例如聚二甲基矽氧烷)之重量。關於標記單位g/mol,換算成官能基1 mol。單體S1之官能基當量例如可根據基於核磁共振(NMR)之 1H-NMR(質子NMR)之光譜強度而算出。基於 1H-NMR之光譜強度之單體S1之官能基當量(g/mol)之算出可基於有關 1H-NMR光譜解析之一般結構解析方法,視需要參照日本專利第5951153號公報之記載而進行。單體S1之官能基當量中,上述官能基意指聚合性官能基(例如(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基、烯丙基等乙烯性不飽和基)。 Here, the "functional group equivalent" refers to the weight of the main skeleton (eg, polydimethylsiloxane) bonded to each functional group. The notation unit g/mol is converted to 1 mol of the functional group. The functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can be calculated from, for example, the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR (proton NMR) by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). The functional group equivalent weight (g/mol) of the monomer S1 based on the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR can be calculated based on the general structure analysis method related to the spectral analysis of 1 H-NMR, if necessary, referring to the description of Japanese Patent No. 5951153. conduct. In the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1, the above-mentioned functional group means a polymerizable functional group (for example, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group).

再者,於使用官能基當量不同之兩種以上之單體作為單體S1之情形時,作為單體S1之官能基當量,可使用算術平均值。即,包含官能基當量不同之n種單體(單體S1 1、單體S1 2・・・單體S1 n)的單體S1之官能基當量可藉由下述式進行計算。 單體S1之官能基當量(g/mol)=(單體S1 1之官能基當量×單體S1 1之調配量+單體S1 2之官能基當量×單體S1 2之調配量+・・・+單體S1 n之官能基當量×單體S1 n之調配量)/(單體S1 1之調配量+單體S1 2之調配量+・・・+單體S1 n之調配量) In addition, when two or more monomers with different functional group equivalents are used as the monomer S1, the arithmetic mean value can be used as the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1. That is, the functional group equivalent of monomer S1 including n types of monomers (monomer S1 1 , monomer S1 2 , monomer S1 n ) having different functional group equivalents can be calculated by the following formula. The functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 (g/mol) = (the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 1 × the preparation amount of the monomer S1 1 + the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 2 × the preparation amount of the monomer S1 2 +・・・+ Functional group equivalent of monomer S1 n × compounded amount of monomer S1 n )/( compounded amount of monomer S1 1 + compounded amount of monomer S1 2 +・・・+ compounded amount of monomer S1 n )

單體S1之含量可於使用該單體S1發揮所期望之效果之範圍內採用適當值,並不限定於特定範圍。就充分地抑制初期黏著力之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分(單體原料B)之總量中,單體S1之含量例如可為5重量%以上,就更好地發揮作為黏著力上升延遲劑之效果之觀點而言,較佳為10重量%以上,更佳為12重量%以上,進而較佳為15重量%以上,尤佳為18重量%以上,亦可為20重量%以上。又,就聚合反應性或相容性之觀點而言,單體原料B中之單體S1之含量例如可為80重量%以下,適宜設為60重量%以下,較佳為50重量%以下,更佳為40重量%以下,進而較佳為30重量%以下。藉由將單體S1之聚合比率設為適當範圍,可適宜地表現黏著力之上升。The content of the monomer S1 can adopt an appropriate value within the range in which the desired effect is exhibited by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing the initial adhesion, in some aspects, the content of the monomer S1 in the total amount of the monomer components (monomer raw materials B) used to prepare the polymer (B) may be, for example, 5 % by weight or more is preferably at least 10% by weight, more preferably at least 12% by weight, further preferably at least 15% by weight, and particularly preferably at least 15% by weight, from the viewpoint of better exerting the effect as an adhesion increase retarder. 18% by weight or more, and may be 20% by weight or more. In addition, from the viewpoint of polymerization reactivity or compatibility, the content of the monomer S1 in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 80% by weight or less, preferably 60% by weight or less, preferably 50% by weight or less, More preferably, it is 40% by weight or less, and still more preferably 30% by weight or less. By setting the polymerization ratio of the monomer S1 to an appropriate range, an increase in adhesive force can be appropriately expressed.

單體原料B除單體S1以外,還包含能夠與單體S1共聚之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。藉由使用一種或兩種以上之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體,可適宜地調節黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性。又,亦可有助於改善聚合物(B)與聚合物(A)之相容性。包含(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元之聚合物(B)可與丙烯酸系聚合物良好地相容,因此容易藉由提高黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性而實現初期黏著力之降低及加熱後黏著力之提高。The monomer raw material B contains the (meth)acrylic monomer which can be copolymerized with the monomer S1 in addition to the monomer S1. The mobility of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted by using one or two or more (meth)acrylic monomers. Moreover, it can also contribute to improving the compatibility of a polymer (B) and a polymer (A). The polymer (B) containing the (meth)acrylic monomer unit can be well compatible with the acrylic polymer, so it is easy to achieve initial adhesion by improving the mobility of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer decrease and increase in adhesion after heating.

此處所揭示之技術中使用之聚合物(B)中,單體原料B所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成較佳為設定為,基於該(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成之玻璃轉移溫度T B1高於聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A。T B1例如可設定為高於0℃。此處,基於(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成之玻璃轉移溫度T B1係指僅基於用於製備聚合物(B)之單體成分中(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成,藉由Fox式而求出之Tg。T B1可僅以用於製備聚合物(B)之單體成分中(甲基)丙烯酸系單體作為對象,應用上述Fox式,根據各(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度與各(甲基)丙烯酸系單體於該(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量中所占之重量分率而算出。藉由玻璃轉移溫度T B1相對較高之(典型的是高於0℃之)聚合物(B),容易抑制初期黏著力。又,藉由玻璃轉移溫度T B1相對較高之(典型的是高於0℃之)聚合物(B),容易獲得黏著力上升比較大之補強用膜。 In the polymer (B) used in the technique disclosed herein, the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomer contained in the monomer raw material B is preferably set based on the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomer The glass transition temperature TB1 of the polymer (A) is higher than the glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ). T B1 can be set to be higher than 0°C, for example. Here, the glass transition temperature T B1 based on the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomer refers to the composition based only on the (meth)acrylic monomer in the monomer component used for preparing the polymer (B), by Tg obtained by Fox formula. T B1 can only target the (meth)acrylic monomers in the monomer components used to prepare the polymer (B), and apply the above-mentioned Fox formula, according to the glass of the homopolymer of each (meth)acrylic monomer. The transition temperature and the weight fraction of each (meth)acrylic-based monomer in the total amount of the (meth)acrylic-based monomer were calculated. The initial adhesion is easily suppressed by the polymer (B) having a relatively high glass transition temperature T B1 (typically higher than 0° C.). In addition, by the polymer (B) having a relatively high glass transition temperature T B1 (typically higher than 0° C.), it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film with a relatively large increase in adhesive force.

於若干較佳態樣中,T B1為10℃以上,更佳為30℃以上,進而較佳為40℃以上,亦可為45℃以上。若T B1變高,則有貼附初期之黏著力一般更好地得到抑制之傾向。認為其原因在於,藉由T B1為規定溫度以上之聚合物(B),隨著溫度上升至室溫或高於室溫某種程度之高溫區域而導致的聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之運動性或移動性之提高,被聚合物(B)中所含之源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元有效地抑制,可更好地維持因上述聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之存在導致的低黏著性。就穩定性更好地維持貼附初期之低黏著性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,T B1例如可為50℃以上,可為55℃以上,亦可為60℃以上。又,T B1例如可為120℃以下,亦可為100℃以下。若T B1變低,則有加熱導致之黏著力上升容易化之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,T B1例如為90℃以下,更佳為70℃以下,進而較佳為60℃以下,尤佳為55℃以下(例如50℃以下)。 In some preferred aspects, T B1 is 10°C or higher, more preferably 30°C or higher, still more preferably 40°C or higher, and may be 45°C or higher. When T B1 becomes high, there exists a tendency for the adhesive force in the initial stage of attachment to be suppressed better generally. The reason for this is considered to be the movement of the polyorganosiloxane moiety due to the fact that T B1 is the polymer (B) having a predetermined temperature or higher, as the temperature rises to room temperature or a high temperature region to some extent higher than room temperature The improvement of the property or mobility is effectively suppressed by the monomer unit derived from the (meth)acrylic monomer contained in the polymer (B), so that the above-mentioned polyorganosiloxane structural moiety can be better maintained. The presence of resulting low adhesion. From the viewpoint of maintaining the low tackiness in the initial stage of attachment with better stability, in some aspects, T B1 may be, for example, 50°C or higher, 55°C or higher, or 60°C or higher. Moreover, T B1 may be 120 degrees C or less, for example, and 100 degrees C or less may be sufficient as it. When T B1 becomes low, there exists a tendency for the increase of adhesive force by heating to become easy. In some preferred aspects, T B1 is, for example, 90°C or lower, more preferably 70°C or lower, further preferably 60°C or lower, and particularly preferably 55°C or lower (eg, 50°C or lower).

就容易發揮藉由適當設定T B1所產生之效果之觀點而言,單體S1與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量於用以製備聚合物(B)之全部單體成分中所占之比率例如可為50重量%以上,可為70重量%以上,可為85重量%以上,可為90重量%以上,可為95重量%以上,亦可實質上為100重量%。 The total amount of the monomer S1 and the (meth)acrylic monomer in the total amount of the monomer components used to prepare the polymer (B) accounts for the ease of exhibiting the effect by appropriately setting T B1 . The ratio may be, for example, 50% by weight or more, 70% by weight or more, 85% by weight or more, 90% by weight or more, 95% by weight or more, or substantially 100% by weight.

聚合物(B)之玻璃轉移溫度T B並無特別限定,可以於此處所揭示之補強用膜中獲得較佳特性之方式進行選擇。聚合物(B)之T B例如可未達50℃,可為30℃以下,可為20℃以下,可為15℃以下,亦可為10℃以下。若聚合物(B)之T B變低,則該聚合物(B)之移動性(典型的是感溫運動性)提高,可使黏著力大幅地上升。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B為5℃以下,可未達0℃,可為-5℃以下,亦可為-10℃以下。又,於若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B例如可為-40℃以上,亦可為-30℃以上。呈現T B越高,則貼附於被黏著體時偏靠於黏著劑層表面側之聚合物(B)越有助於降低初期黏著力,貼附初期之輕剝離性越優異之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B為-20℃以上,亦可為-15℃以上。藉由將T B設定為適當範圍,可將貼附初期之輕剝離性與加熱後之黏著力上升控制為較佳範圍。 The glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) is not particularly limited, and it can be selected so as to obtain preferable properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein. The TB of the polymer ( B ) may be, for example, less than 50°C, 30°C or lower, 20°C or lower, 15°C or lower, or 10°C or lower. When the TB of the polymer ( B ) is lowered, the mobility (typically, thermokinetic properties) of the polymer (B) is improved, and the adhesive force can be greatly improved. In some preferred aspects, the TB of the polymer ( B ) is below 5°C, may be less than 0°C, may be below -5°C, and may be below -10°C. In addition, in some aspects, the TB of the polymer ( B ) may be, for example, -40°C or higher, or -30°C or higher. The higher the TB, the more the polymer ( B ) which is biased toward the surface side of the adhesive layer when attached to the adherend, contributes to lowering the initial adhesive force, and tends to be more excellent in light peelability at the initial stage of attachment. In some preferred aspects, the TB of the polymer ( B ) is -20°C or higher, and may also be -15°C or higher. By setting TB to an appropriate range, the light peelability in the initial stage of attachment and the increase in the adhesive force after heating can be controlled to a suitable range.

於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分之組成可設定為,T B1高於T B、即T B1-T B大於0℃。根據此種組成,容易適宜地發揮出利用上述單體成分所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成調節聚合物(B)之移動性之效果。T B1-T B例如可為40℃~100℃左右,亦可為50℃~90℃左右。於若干較佳態樣中,T B1-T B為45℃以上,更佳為50℃以上,進而較佳為55℃以上(例如58℃以上)。又,就適宜地表現含有聚合物(B)之效果之觀點而言,T B1-T B較佳為80℃以下,更佳為70℃以下,進而較佳為65℃以下(例如62℃以下)。 In some aspects, the composition of the monomer components used to prepare the polymer (B) can be set such that T B1 is higher than T B , ie, T B1 - T B is greater than 0°C. According to such a composition, the effect of adjusting the mobility of the polymer (B) by the composition of the (meth)acrylic-based monomer contained in the monomer component can be easily and appropriately exhibited. T B1 -TB may be, for example, about 40° C to 100°C, or about 50°C to 90°C. In some preferred aspects, T B1 -TB is 45° C or higher, more preferably 50°C or higher, and still more preferably 55°C or higher (eg, 58°C or higher). In addition, from the viewpoint of appropriately expressing the effect of containing the polymer ( B ), TB1 -TB is preferably 80°C or lower, more preferably 70°C or lower, still more preferably 65°C or lower (for example, 62°C or lower). ).

就容易控制黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分之組成可設定為,於與聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A之關係上,T B較T A高20℃以上,即T B-T A為20℃以上。於若干較佳態樣中,T B-T A例如為30℃以上,更佳為40℃以上,進而較佳為50℃以上,可為60℃以上,亦可為70℃以上。又,就黏著力上升之觀點而言,T B-T A例如可為130℃以下,亦可為120℃以下,較佳為100℃以下,更佳為80℃以下,進而較佳為65℃以下,可為55℃以下,亦可為45℃以下。 From the viewpoint of easily controlling the mobility of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer, in some aspects, the composition of the monomer components used to prepare the polymer (B) can be set to be In the relationship between the glass transition temperature TA of A ), TB is higher than TA by 20° C or more, that is, TB- TA is 20° C or more. In some preferred aspects, T B -TA is, for example, 30°C or higher, more preferably 40°C or higher, still more preferably 50°C or higher, may be 60°C or higher, or 70°C or higher. In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the adhesive force, T B - T A may be, for example, 130° C. or lower, or 120° C. or lower, preferably 100° C. or lower, more preferably 80° C. or lower, and still more preferably 65° C. Below, it may be 55°C or lower, or 45°C or lower.

作為可用於單體原料B之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體,例如可例舉(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。此處所謂「烷基」係指鏈狀(包括直鏈狀、支鏈狀)之烷基(基),不包括下述脂環式烴基。例如可使用上文中關於可用於聚合物(A)之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所例示之單體之一種或兩種以上作為單體原料B之構成成分。於若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-12烷基酯(較佳為(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-10烷基酯,例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯)之至少一種。於其他若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有甲基丙烯酸C 1-18烷基酯(較佳為甲基丙烯酸C 1-14烷基酯,例如甲基丙烯酸C 1-10烷基酯)之至少一種。單體原料B可包含例如選自MMA、甲基丙烯酸正丁酯(BMA)及甲基丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHMA)之一種或兩種以上作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。 As a (meth)acrylic-type monomer which can be used for the monomer raw material B, (meth)acrylic-acid alkylester is mentioned, for example. The term "alkyl" as used herein refers to a chain (including linear and branched) alkyl groups (groups), excluding the following alicyclic hydrocarbon groups. For example, as a constituent component of the monomer raw material B, one or two or more of the monomers exemplified above with respect to the alkyl (meth)acrylate that can be used in the polymer (A) can be used. In some aspects, the monomer raw material B may contain a C 4-12 alkyl (meth)acrylate (preferably a C 4-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate, such as a C 6- (meth)acrylate) 10 alkyl esters) at least one. In other aspects, the monomer raw material B may contain a C 1-18 alkyl methacrylate (preferably a C 1-14 alkyl methacrylate, such as a C 1-10 alkyl methacrylate) at least one of them. The monomer raw material B may contain, for example, one or two or more selected from MMA, n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), and 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA) as a (meth)acrylic monomer.

作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之其他例,可例舉具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯。例如可使用(甲基)丙烯酸環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異𦯉酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸1-金剛烷基酯等。於若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有選自甲基丙烯酸二環戊酯、甲基丙烯酸異𦯉酯及甲基丙烯酸環己酯之至少一種作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。As another example of the said (meth)acrylic-type monomer, the (meth)acrylate which has an alicyclic hydrocarbon group is mentioned. For example, cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, iso(meth)acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate can be used esters, etc. In some aspects, the monomer raw material B may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of dicyclopentyl methacrylate, isophthalic methacrylate, and cyclohexyl methacrylate as a (meth)acrylic monomer.

單體原料B中之上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及上述具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯之含量例如可為10重量%以上95重量%以下,可為20重量%以上95重量%以下,可為30重量%以上90重量%以下,可為40重量%以上90重量%以下,亦可為50重量%以上85重量%以下。就藉由加熱之黏著力之上升容易性之觀點而言,使用(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯可變得有利。於若干態樣中,具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯之含量可未達單體原料B之50重量%,可未達30重量%,可未達15重量%,可未達10重量%,亦可未達5重量%。亦可不使用具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯。The content of the above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylate and the above-mentioned (meth)acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 10% by weight or more and 95% by weight or less, or 20% by weight or more. % by weight or less, 30% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, 40% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, or 50% by weight or more and 85% by weight or less. The use of an alkyl (meth)acrylate may become advantageous from the viewpoint of the easiness of increasing the adhesive force by heating. In some aspects, the content of the (meth)acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be less than 50% by weight of the monomer raw material B, may be less than 30% by weight, may be less than 15% by weight, and may be less than 10% by weight. % by weight, but may be less than 5% by weight. The (meth)acrylate which has an alicyclic hydrocarbon group may not be used.

於若干較佳態樣中,作為單體原料B之構成成分之上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體可包含均聚物之Tg為50℃以上之單體M2。聚合物(B)中,藉由使單體S1與單體M2共聚,容易適宜地控制伴隨溫度上升之聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之運動性或移動性,同時實現初期輕剝離性(二次加工性)與加熱後之黏著力上升。於若干態樣中,單體M2之均聚物之Tg可為60℃以上,可為70℃以上,可為80℃以上,亦可為90℃以上。又,單體M2之均聚物之Tg之上限並無特別限制,就聚合物(B)之合成容易性等觀點而言,通常適宜為200℃以下。於若干態樣中,單體M2之均聚物之Tg例如可為180℃以下,可為150℃以下,亦可為120℃以下。In some preferred aspects, the above-mentioned (meth)acrylic monomer as a constituent of the monomer raw material B may include a monomer M2 whose Tg of the homopolymer is 50° C. or higher. In the polymer (B), by copolymerizing the monomer S1 and the monomer M2, it is easy to appropriately control the mobility or mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structural moiety accompanying the temperature rise, and at the same time realize the initial light peeling property (secondary). Processability) and increased adhesion after heating. In some aspects, the Tg of the homopolymer of monomer M2 can be above 60°C, can be above 70°C, can be above 80°C, and can also be above 90°C. In addition, the upper limit of the Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 200° C. or lower from the viewpoint of the ease of synthesis of the polymer (B). In some aspects, the Tg of the homopolymer of monomer M2 may be, for example, 180°C or lower, 150°C or lower, or 120°C or lower.

作為單體M2,例如可自上述中所例示之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體中使用均聚物之Tg滿足條件者。例如可使用選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體。作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可良好地採用烷基之碳原子數為1~4之範圍之甲基丙烯酸烷基酯。As the monomer M2, for example, one that satisfies the Tg of the homopolymer can be used from among the (meth)acrylic monomers exemplified above. For example, one or two or more monomers selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylate and (meth)acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group can be used. As the alkyl (meth)acrylate, an alkyl methacrylate having an alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms can be suitably used.

於單體原料B包含單體M2之態樣中,單體M2之含量例如可為單體原料B之5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為15重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為25重量%以上,亦可為30重量%以上。於若干態樣中,上述單體M2之含量可為單體原料B之35重量%以上,可為40重量%以上,可為45重量%以上,可為50重量%以上,亦可為55重量%以上。又,上述單體M2之含量例如可為90重量%以下,通常適宜為80重量%以下,較佳為75重量%以下,可為70重量%以下,亦可為65重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,單體M2之含量為60重量%以下(例如50重量%以下、典型為42重量%以下)。於聚合物(B)中,藉由將Tg為50℃以上之單體M2之共聚比率限制為規定值以下,可基於50℃附近之聚合物(B)之移動性,良好地實現加熱後之黏著力上升。就相同之觀點而言,單體原料B中之單體M2之含量可為35重量%以下,可為25重量%以下,亦可為15重量%以下(例如5重量%以下)。In the aspect in which the monomer raw material B includes the monomer M2, the content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 5 wt % or more of the monomer raw material B, 10 wt % or more, 15 wt % or more, or 20 wt %. % or more, may be 25% by weight or more, or may be 30% by weight or more. In some aspects, the content of the monomer M2 may be more than 35% by weight of the monomer raw material B, may be more than 40% by weight, may be more than 45% by weight, may be more than 50% by weight, and may be more than 55% by weight %above. Moreover, the content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 90 wt % or less, usually 80 wt % or less, preferably 75 wt % or less, 70 wt % or less, or 65 wt % or less. In some preferred aspects, the content of the monomer M2 is 60 wt % or less (eg, 50 wt % or less, typically 42 wt % or less). In the polymer (B), by restricting the copolymerization ratio of the monomer M2 having a Tg of 50°C or higher to a predetermined value or less, it is possible to achieve a good performance after heating based on the mobility of the polymer (B) around 50°C. Adhesion increases. From the same viewpoint, the content of the monomer M2 in the monomer raw material B may be 35 wt % or less, 25 wt % or less, or 15 wt % or less (eg, 5 wt % or less).

上述單體M2之含量例如可良好地應用於單體M2包含選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及上述具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體的態樣、或單體M2包含選自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯(例如甲基丙烯酸烷基酯)之一種或兩種以上之單體的態樣。作為該態樣之一較佳例,可例舉上述單體M2包含MMA之態樣。The content of the above-mentioned monomer M2 is suitable, for example, when the monomer M2 contains one or two selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylate and the above-mentioned (meth)acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group The aspect of the above monomer, or the aspect in which the monomer M2 includes one or two or more monomers selected from alkyl (meth)acrylate (eg, alkyl methacrylate). As a preferred example of this aspect, the aspect in which the above-mentioned monomer M2 includes MMA can be exemplified.

於若干態樣中,上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體亦可包含均聚物之Tg未達50℃(典型的是-20℃以上且未達50℃)之單體M3。藉由使用單體M3,容易獲得於黏著力上升後均衡地兼顧黏著力與凝集力之補強用膜。就容易發揮該效果之觀點而言,單體M3較佳為與單體M2組合而使用。In some aspects, the above-mentioned (meth)acrylic monomers may also include monomer M3 whose homopolymer Tg is less than 50°C (typically above -20°C and less than 50°C). By using the monomer M3, it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film that balances the adhesive force and the cohesive force after the adhesive force is increased. The monomer M3 is preferably used in combination with the monomer M2 from the viewpoint of easily exhibiting this effect.

作為單體M3,例如可自上文中所例示之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體中使用均聚物之Tg滿足條件者。例如可使用選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體。As the monomer M3, for example, among the (meth)acrylic-based monomers exemplified above, one that satisfies the Tg of the homopolymer can be used. For example, one or two or more monomers selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylates can be used.

於單體原料B包含單體M3之態樣中,單體M3之含量例如可為單體原料B之5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為15重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為25重量%以上,可為30重量%以上,亦可為35重量%以上。又,單體M3之含量通常適宜設為單體原料B之70重量%以下,可為60重量%以下,亦可為50重量%以下。上述單體M3之含量例如可良好地應用於單體M3包含選自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯(例如甲基丙烯酸烷基酯)之一種或兩種以上單體之態樣。In the aspect in which the monomer raw material B includes the monomer M3, the content of the monomer M3 may be, for example, 5 wt % or more of the monomer raw material B, 10 wt % or more, 15 wt % or more, or 20 wt %. % or more, 25% by weight or more, 30% by weight or more, or 35% by weight or more. In addition, the content of the monomer M3 is usually preferably 70% by weight or less of the monomer raw material B, and may be 60% by weight or less, or 50% by weight or less. The content of the above-mentioned monomer M3, for example, can be well applied to the aspect in which the monomer M3 contains one or two or more monomers selected from alkyl (meth)acrylate (eg, alkyl methacrylate).

於此處所揭示之補強用膜之若干態樣中,單體原料B較佳為均聚物之Tg高於170℃之單體之含量為30重量%以下。此處,本說明書中所謂單體之含量為X重量%以下,於未特別說明之情形時,其概念包括該單體之含量為0重量%之態樣、即實質上不含該單體之態樣。又,所謂實質上不含係指至少未刻意地使用上述單體。若均聚物之Tg高於170℃之單體之共聚比率變高,則聚合物(B)之移動性容易不足而有可能難以藉由加熱至高於50℃之溫度區域而使黏著力上升。In some aspects of the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the monomer raw material B is preferably a homopolymer whose Tg is higher than 170°C and whose content is 30% by weight or less. Here, in this specification, the so-called content of the monomer is X wt % or less, and unless otherwise specified, the concept includes the aspect in which the monomer content is 0 wt %, that is, the monomer does not substantially contain the monomer. manner. In addition, the term "substantially not containing" means that at least the above-mentioned monomer is not intentionally used. If the copolymerization ratio of the monomer whose Tg of the homopolymer is higher than 170°C becomes high, the mobility of the polymer (B) tends to be insufficient, and it may be difficult to increase the adhesive force by heating to a temperature range higher than 50°C.

於若干態樣中,單體原料B較佳為至少包含MMA作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。藉由使MMA共聚而成之聚合物(B),容易獲得加熱後黏著力較大之補強用膜。MMA於單體原料B所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量中所占之比率例如可為5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為30重量%以上,亦可為40重量%以上。又,MMA於單體原料B之合計量中所占之比率通常適宜為95重量%以下,於若干較佳態樣中,就加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,MMA於單體原料B之合計量中所占之比率可為75重量%以下,可為65重量%以下,可為60重量%以下,亦可為55重量%以下(例如50重量%以下)。In some aspects, the monomer raw material B preferably contains at least MMA as a (meth)acrylic monomer. The polymer (B) obtained by copolymerizing MMA can easily obtain a reinforcing film with a large adhesive force after heating. The ratio of MMA to the total amount of (meth)acrylic monomers contained in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, or 30% by weight. % by weight or more, and may be 40% by weight or more. In addition, the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the monomer raw material B is usually preferably 95% by weight or less. The ratio of the total amount may be 75% by weight or less, 65% by weight or less, 60% by weight or less, or 55% by weight or less (eg, 50% by weight or less).

作為構成聚合物(B)之單體單元中可與單體S1一起含有之單體之其他例,可例舉:上文中作為可用於聚合物(A)之單體所例示之含羧基單體、含酸酐基單體、含羥基單體、含環氧基單體、含氰基單體、含異氰酸基單體、含醯胺基單體、具有含氮原子之環之單體(N-乙烯基環狀醯胺、具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺、具有丁二醯亞胺骨架之單體、順丁烯二醯亞胺類、伊康醯亞胺類等)、(甲基)丙烯酸胺基烷基酯類、乙烯酯類、乙烯醚類、烯烴類、具有芳香族烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含有雜環之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含有鹵素原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、由萜烯化合物衍生物醇獲得之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。As another example of the monomer which can be contained together with the monomer S1 in the monomer unit which comprises the polymer (B), the carboxyl group-containing monomer exemplified above as the monomer which can be used for the polymer (A) can be mentioned. , Anhydride group-containing monomers, hydroxyl group-containing monomers, epoxy group-containing monomers, cyano group-containing monomers, isocyanate group-containing monomers, amide group-containing monomers, monomers with rings containing nitrogen atoms ( N-vinyl cyclic amides, cyclic amides with (meth)acrylamides, monomers with succinimide skeleton, maleimides, iconimides, etc. ), aminoalkyl (meth)acrylates, vinyl esters, vinyl ethers, olefins, (meth)acrylates with aromatic hydrocarbon groups, (meth)acrylates containing heterocycles, halogen-containing (meth)acrylates of atoms, (meth)acrylates obtained from alcohols derived from terpene compounds, and the like.

作為構成聚合物(B)之單體單元中可與單體S1一起含有之單體之進而其他例,可例舉:乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等氧伸烷基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯;具有聚氧伸烷基骨架之單體,例如於聚乙二醇或聚丙二醇等聚氧伸烷基鏈之一末端具有(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基、烯丙基等聚合性官能基,於另一末端具有醚結構(烷基醚、芳醚、芳基烷基醚等)之聚合性聚氧伸烷基醚;(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丁氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基丙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基烷基酯;(甲基)丙烯酸鹼金屬鹽等鹽;三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多元(甲基)丙烯酸酯:偏二氯乙烯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-氯乙酯等鹵化乙烯化合物;2-乙烯基-2-㗁唑啉、2-乙烯基-5-甲基-2-㗁唑啉、2-異丙烯基-2-㗁唑啉等含㗁唑啉基之單體;(甲基)丙烯醯基氮丙啶、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-氮丙啶基乙酯等含氮丙啶基之單體;(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基丙酯、內酯類與(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基乙酯之加成物等含羥基之乙烯基單體;氟取代(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等含氟乙烯基單體;2-氯乙基乙烯醚、單氯乙酸乙烯酯等含有反應性鹵素之乙烯基單體;如乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、烯丙基三甲氧基矽烷、三甲氧基矽烷基丙基烯丙胺、2-甲氧基乙氧基三甲氧基矽烷之含有有機矽之乙烯基單體;此外,可例舉:於使乙烯基聚合所得之單體末端具有自由基聚合性乙烯基之巨單體類等。該等可使單獨一種或兩種以上之組合與單體S1共聚。As still another example of the monomer which can be contained together with the monomer S1 in the monomer unit which comprises the polymer (B), ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol di(methyl) ) acrylate, triethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, propylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, dipropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, tripropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate Oxyalkylene di(meth)acrylates such as (meth)acrylates; monomers having a polyoxyalkylene skeleton, for example, at one end of a polyoxyalkylene chain such as polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol, A polymerizable polyoxyalkylene group having a polymerizable functional group such as a (meth)acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group, and an ether structure (alkyl ether, aryl ether, aryl alkyl ether, etc.) at the other end Ethers; Methoxyethyl (Meth)acrylate, Ethoxyethyl (Meth)acrylate, Propoxyethyl (Meth)acrylate, Butoxyethyl (Meth)acrylate, (Meth) (meth)alkoxyalkyl acrylates such as ethoxypropyl acrylate; salts such as alkali metal (meth)acrylates; poly(meth)acrylates such as trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate : halogenated vinyl compounds such as vinylidene chloride and 2-chloroethyl (meth)acrylate; 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2 - Monomers containing oxazoline groups such as isopropenyl-2-oxazoline; base monomers; (meth)acrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid-2-hydroxypropyl ester, adducts of lactones and (meth)acrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl ester, etc. Hydroxyl-containing vinyl monomers; fluorine-substituted (meth)acrylic acid alkyl esters and other fluorine-containing vinyl monomers; 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether, monochlorovinyl acetate and other vinyl monomers containing reactive halogens; such as Vinyltrimethoxysilane, γ-(meth)acryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, allyltrimethoxysilane, trimethoxysilylpropylallylamine, 2-methoxyethoxy Organosilicon-containing vinyl monomers of trimethoxysilane; and macromonomers having radically polymerizable vinyl groups at the ends of the monomers obtained by polymerizing vinyl groups. These can be copolymerized with the monomer S1 singly or in combination of two or more.

於若干態樣中,作為聚合物(B),可良好地採用不具有與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基者。換言之,聚合物(B)較佳為以不與聚合物(A)化學鍵結之形態含有於黏著劑層中。以此種形態含有聚合物(B)之黏著劑層於加熱時聚合物(B)之移動性良好,適於提高黏著力上升比。與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基可能因該聚合物(A)所具有之官能基之種類而異,例如可為環氧基、異氰酸基、羧基、烷氧基矽烷基、胺基等。In some aspects, as the polymer (B), one that does not have a functional group that causes a crosslinking reaction with the polymer (A) can be suitably used. In other words, the polymer (B) is preferably contained in the adhesive layer in a form not chemically bonded to the polymer (A). The adhesive layer containing the polymer (B) in this form has good mobility of the polymer (B) when heated, and is suitable for increasing the adhesive force increase ratio. The functional group for cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) may vary depending on the type of functional group possessed by the polymer (A), such as epoxy group, isocyanate group, carboxyl group, alkoxysilyl group , amine groups, etc.

聚合物(B)之Mw並無特別限定。聚合物(B)之Mw例如可為1000以上,亦可為5000以上。於若干較佳態樣中,就適宜地表現加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,聚合物(B)之Mw可為10,000以上,更佳為12,000以上,可為15,000以上,可為20,000以上,可為22,000以上,亦可為25,000以上。於其他若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw可為30,000以上,可為50,000以上,亦可為70,000以上。聚合物(B)之Mw之上限例如為500,000以下,可為350,000以下,可為200,000以下,亦可為150,000以下。就將黏著劑層內之相容性或移動性調節至適度範圍,適宜地表現貼附初期之低黏著性之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw為100,000以下,更佳為80,000以下,進而較佳為60,000以下,尤佳為40,000以下(例如30,000以下),可為25,000以下,進而亦可為20,000以下。藉由將聚合物(B)之Mw設定為適當範圍,容易獲得貼附初期之輕剝離性與黏著力上升性之兼顧性優異之黏著劑。The Mw of the polymer (B) is not particularly limited. The Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 1,000 or more, or 5,000 or more. In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be 10,000 or more, more preferably 12,000 or more, 15,000 or more, or 20,000 or more, from the viewpoint of suitably expressing the increase in adhesion after heating. , may be 22,000 or more, or 25,000 or more. In other aspects, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be 30,000 or more, 50,000 or more, or 70,000 or more. The upper limit of the Mw of the polymer (B) is, for example, 500,000 or less, 350,000 or less, 200,000 or less, or 150,000 or less. From the viewpoint of adjusting the compatibility or mobility in the adhesive layer to an appropriate range and appropriately expressing low adhesion at the initial stage of attachment, in some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) is 100,000 Below, 80,000 or less are more preferable, 60,000 or less are more preferable, 40,000 or less (for example, 30,000 or less) are especially preferable, 25,000 or less may be sufficient, and 20,000 or less may be sufficient. By setting the Mw of the polymer (B) to an appropriate range, it becomes easy to obtain an adhesive excellent in both the light peeling property and the adhesive force increasing property in the initial stage of sticking.

於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw較佳為低於聚合物(A)之Mw。藉此,容易實現兼顧貼附初期之良好二次加工性與加熱後之黏著力上升之補強用膜。於若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw例如可為聚合物(A)之Mw之0.8倍以下,可為0.75倍以下,可為0.5倍以下,亦可為0.3倍以下。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw B相對於聚合物(A)之Mw A之比(Mw B/Mw A)為0.3以下,更佳為0.2以下,進而較佳為0.1以下,尤佳為0.06以下(例如0.05以下)。又,比(Mw B/Mw A)例如適宜為0.010以上,較佳為0.020以上,更佳為0.03以上,進而較佳為0.04以上。藉由將聚合物(A)之Mw與聚合物(B)之Mw設定為適宜範圍,可更好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。於其他若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw亦可為聚合物(A)之Mw之0.03倍以下(例如0.02倍以下)。 In certain preferred aspects, the Mw of polymer (B) is preferably lower than the Mw of polymer (A). Thereby, it becomes easy to implement|achieve the reinforcement film which combines favorable secondary workability in the initial stage of attachment and the increase of the adhesive force after heating. In some aspects, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 0.8 times or less, 0.75 times or less, 0.5 times or less, or 0.3 times or less of the Mw of the polymer (A). In some preferred aspects, the ratio of the Mw B of the polymer (B) to the Mw A of the polymer (A) (Mw B /Mw A ) is 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, and still more preferably 0.1 Below, it is especially preferable that it is 0.06 or less (for example, 0.05 or less). Moreover, the ratio (Mw B /Mw A ) is, for example, preferably 0.010 or more, preferably 0.020 or more, more preferably 0.03 or more, and still more preferably 0.04 or more. By setting the Mw of the polymer (A) and the Mw of the polymer (B) to suitable ranges, the effects of the techniques disclosed herein can be better achieved. In other aspects, the Mw of the polymer (B) may also be 0.03 times or less (eg, 0.02 times or less) of the Mw of the polymer (A).

聚合物(B)例如可藉由利用溶液聚合法、乳化聚合法、塊體聚合法、懸濁聚合法、光聚合法等公知方法使上述單體聚合而製作。The polymer (B) can be produced by polymerizing the above-mentioned monomers by known methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization, for example.

為了調整聚合物(B)之分子量,可視需要使用鏈轉移劑。作為所使用之鏈轉移劑之例,可例舉:辛基硫醇、月桂基硫醇、第三壬基硫醇、第三(十二烷基)硫醇、巰基乙醇、α-硫甘油等具有巰基之化合物;硫代乙醇酸、硫代乙醇酸甲酯、硫代乙醇酸乙酯、硫代乙醇酸丙酯、硫代乙醇酸丁酯、硫代乙醇酸第三丁酯、硫代乙醇酸2-乙基己酯、硫代乙醇酸辛酯、硫代乙醇酸異辛酯、硫代乙醇酸癸酯、硫代乙醇酸十二烷基酯、乙二醇之硫代乙醇酸酯、新戊二醇之硫代乙醇酸酯、季戊四醇之硫代乙醇酸酯等硫代乙醇酸酯類;α-甲基苯乙烯二聚物等。In order to adjust the molecular weight of the polymer (B), a chain transfer agent may be used as necessary. Examples of the chain transfer agent to be used include octyl mercaptan, lauryl mercaptan, tertiary nonyl mercaptan, tertiary (dodecyl) mercaptan, mercaptoethanol, α-thioglycerol, and the like. Compounds with mercapto groups; thioglycolic acid, methyl thioglycolic acid, ethyl thioglycolic acid, propyl thioglycolic acid, butyl thioglycolic acid, tert-butyl thioglycolic acid, thioethanol 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, octyl thioglycolic acid, isooctyl thioglycolic acid, decyl thioglycolic acid, dodecyl thioglycolic acid, thioglycolic acid ester of ethylene glycol, new Thioglycolic acid ester of pentanediol, thioglycolic acid ester of pentaerythritol, etc.; α-methylstyrene dimer, etc.

作為鏈轉移劑之使用量,並無特別限制,通常相對於單體100重量份,含有鏈轉移劑0.05重量份~20重量份,較佳為0.1重量份~15重量份,進而較佳為0.2重量份~10重量份。藉由如此調整鏈轉移劑之添加量,可獲得較佳之分子量之聚合物(B)。鏈轉移劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。The usage amount of the chain transfer agent is not particularly limited. Usually, the chain transfer agent is contained in an amount of 0.05 to 20 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 to 15 parts by weight, and more preferably 0.2 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the monomer. parts by weight to 10 parts by weight. By adjusting the addition amount of the chain transfer agent in this way, a polymer (B) with a preferable molecular weight can be obtained. A chain transfer agent can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.

作為調整聚合物(B)之分子量之方法,可將包括使用上述鏈轉移劑之先前公知之各種方法單獨使用或適當組合使用。關於聚合物(A)之分子量亦同樣如此。此種方法之非限定例包括聚合方法之選擇、聚合起始劑之種類或使用量之選擇、聚合溫度之選擇、溶液聚合法中之聚合溶劑之種類或使用量之選擇、光聚合法中之光照射強度之選擇等。業者可理解基於包含下述具體例之本案說明書之記載及本案申請時之技術常識,如何獲得具有所需分子量之聚合物。As a method for adjusting the molecular weight of the polymer (B), various previously known methods including the use of the above-mentioned chain transfer agent can be used alone or in an appropriate combination. The same is true for the molecular weight of the polymer (A). Non-limiting examples of such methods include the choice of polymerization method, the choice of the type or amount of polymerization initiator, the choice of polymerization temperature, the choice of the type or amount of polymerization solvent in the solution polymerization method, the choice of the type or amount of polymerization solvent in the photopolymerization method, The choice of light irradiation intensity, etc. Those skilled in the art can understand how to obtain a polymer having a desired molecular weight based on the description of the description of the present application including the following specific examples and the technical common sense at the time of the application of the present application.

此處所揭示之補強用膜中,相對於聚合物(A)之使用量100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量例如可設為0.1重量份以上,就獲得更高效果(適宜為貼附初期之輕剝離性)之觀點而言,較佳為0.5重量份以上,更佳為1重量份以上,進而較佳為1.5重量份以上,亦可設為2重量份以上。於若干態樣中,就提高二次加工性等觀點而言,上述聚合物(B)之使用量例如可設為3重量份以上,可設為4重量份以上,亦可設為5重量份以上。又,相對於聚合物(A)之使用量100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量例如可為75重量份以下,可為30重量份以下,可為10重量份以下,亦可為8重量份以下。就適宜實現目標之黏著力上升之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量為5重量份以下,更佳為4重量份以下,進而較佳為3重量份以下,尤佳為2.5重量份以下。於其他若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量為1.5重量份以下(例如1.2重量份以下)。藉由將聚合物(B)之使用量設為上述範圍,容易實現良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。又,可更好地兼顧貼附初期之輕剝離性與黏著力上升性。In the reinforcing film disclosed here, the usage amount of the polymer (B) can be, for example, 0.1 part by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) to obtain a higher effect (suitable for sticking). From the viewpoint of initial light peelability), it is preferably 0.5 parts by weight or more, more preferably 1 part by weight or more, still more preferably 1.5 parts by weight or more, and may be 2 parts by weight or more. In some aspects, the usage-amount of the said polymer (B) may be, for example, 3 parts by weight or more, 4 parts by weight or more, or 5 parts by weight from the viewpoint of improving secondary processability, etc. above. Moreover, the usage-amount of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 75 parts by weight or less, 30 parts by weight or less, 10 parts by weight or less, or 8 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). parts by weight or less. In some preferred aspects, the amount of the polymer (B) used is 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 4 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), from the viewpoint of increasing the adhesive force suitable for achieving the target. It is less than or equal to 3 parts by weight, more preferably less than or equal to 3 parts by weight, particularly preferably less than or equal to 2.5 parts by weight. In other preferred aspects, the amount of polymer (B) used is 1.5 parts by weight or less (eg, 1.2 parts by weight or less) relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A). By making the usage-amount of a polymer (B) into the said range, it becomes easy to implement|achieve favorable bending recovery property and bending retention force. In addition, it is possible to achieve a better balance between the light peeling property and the adhesive force increasing property in the initial stage of sticking.

黏著劑層於不會較大地損及此處所揭示之補強用膜之性能之範圍內,可視需要含有聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)以外之聚合物(任意聚合物)。此種任意聚合物之使用量通常適宜設為黏著劑層中所含之聚合物成分整體之20重量%以下,可為15重量%以下,可為10重量%以下。於若干態樣中,上述任意聚合物之使用量可為上述聚合物成分整體之5重量%以下,可為3重量%以下,亦可為1重量%以下。亦可為實質上不含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)以外之聚合物之黏著劑層。The adhesive layer may contain a polymer (any polymer) other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) as necessary within the range that does not greatly impair the performance of the reinforcing film disclosed herein. The usage-amount of such an arbitrary polymer is normally 20 weight% or less of the whole polymer component contained in an adhesive layer, and may be 15 weight% or less, and may be 10 weight% or less. In some aspects, the use amount of the above-mentioned arbitrary polymer may be 5 wt % or less of the whole polymer component, 3 wt % or less, or 1 wt % or less. The adhesive layer may be substantially free of polymers other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B).

(交聯劑) 於黏著劑層中,可視需要使用交聯劑以調整凝聚力等。作為交聯劑,可使用黏著劑之領域公知之交聯劑,例如可例舉:環氧系交聯劑、異氰酸酯系交聯劑、聚矽氧系交聯劑、㗁唑啉系交聯劑、氮丙啶系交聯劑、矽烷系交聯劑、烷基醚化三聚氰胺系交聯劑、金屬螯合物系交聯劑等。適宜使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑、環氧系交聯劑、金屬螯合物系交聯劑。作為適宜地兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力之交聯劑,可良好地使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑。交聯劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 (crosslinking agent) In the adhesive layer, a cross-linking agent may be used to adjust cohesion and the like as needed. As the cross-linking agent, a well-known cross-linking agent in the field of adhesives can be used, for example, epoxy-based cross-linking agent, isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, polysiloxane-based cross-linking agent, oxazoline-based cross-linking agent , aziridine-based cross-linking agent, silane-based cross-linking agent, alkyl etherified melamine-based cross-linking agent, metal chelate-based cross-linking agent, etc. Isocyanate-based cross-linking agents, epoxy-based cross-linking agents, and metal chelate-based cross-linking agents are suitably used. An isocyanate-based crosslinking agent can be favorably used as a crosslinking agent that suitably balances bending recovery and bending retention. A crosslinking agent can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.

作為異氰酸酯系交聯劑,可良好地使用多官能異氰酸酯(意指每1分子平均具有2個以上之異氰酸基之化合物,包括具有異氰尿酸酯結構者)。異氰酸酯系交聯劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。As the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent, a polyfunctional isocyanate (meaning a compound having an average of 2 or more isocyanate groups per molecule, including those having an isocyanurate structure) can be preferably used. The isocyanate-based crosslinking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為多官能異氰酸酯之例,可例舉:脂肪族多異氰酸酯類、脂環族多異氰酸酯類、芳香族多異氰酸酯類等。 作為脂肪族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:1,2-伸乙基二異氰酸酯;1,2-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,3-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,4-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯等四亞甲基二異氰酸酯;1,2-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,3-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,4-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,5-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,6-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、2,5-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯等六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;2-甲基-1,5-戊烷二異氰酸酯、3-甲基-1,5-戊烷二異氰酸酯、離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。 As an example of a polyfunctional isocyanate, aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, aromatic polyisocyanates, etc. are mentioned. Specific examples of the aliphatic polyisocyanates include 1,2-ethylidene diisocyanate; 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,4- Tetramethylene diisocyanates such as tetramethylene diisocyanate; 1,2-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5 - Hexamethylene diisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; 2-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate , 3-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, lysine diisocyanate, etc.

作為脂環族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;1,2-環己基二異氰酸酯、1,3-環己基二異氰酸酯、1,4-環己基二異氰酸酯等環己基二異氰酸酯;1,2-環戊基二異氰酸酯、1,3-環戊基二異氰酸酯等環戊基二異氰酸酯;氫化苯二甲基二異氰酸酯、氫化甲苯二異氰酸酯、氫化二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、氫化四甲基二甲苯二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二環己基甲烷二異氰酸酯等。Specific examples of the alicyclic polyisocyanates include isophorone diisocyanate; Hexyl diisocyanate; cyclopentyl diisocyanate such as 1,2-cyclopentyl diisocyanate and 1,3-cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated xylylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated tolylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate , hydrogenated tetramethylxylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate, etc.

作為芳香族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯、2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、2,4'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、2,2'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基醚二異氰酸酯、2-硝基二苯基-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、2,2'-二苯基丙烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、3,3'-二甲基二苯基甲烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基丙烷二異氰酸酯、間苯二異氰酸酯、對苯二異氰酸酯、伸萘基-1,4-二異氰酸酯、伸萘基-1,5-二異氰酸酯、3,3'-二甲氧基二苯基-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、苯二甲基-1,4-二異氰酸酯、苯二甲基-1,3-二異氰酸酯等。Specific examples of aromatic polyisocyanates include 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenyl Methane diisocyanate, 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenyl ether diisocyanate, 2-nitrodiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate, 2,2'-diisocyanate Phenylpropane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 3,3'-dimethyldiphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylpropane diisocyanate, isophenylene diisocyanate, p-phenylene diisocyanate, naphthylene-1,4-diisocyanate, naphthylene-1,5-diisocyanate, 3,3'-dimethoxydiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate, benzenediol Methyl-1,4-diisocyanate, xylylene-1,3-diisocyanate, etc.

作為較佳之多官能異氰酸酯,可例示每1分子平均具有3個以上之異氰酸基之多官能異氰酸酯。該3官能以上之異氰酸酯可為2官能或3官能以上之異氰酸酯之多聚物(例如二聚物或三聚物)、衍生物(例如多元醇與2分子以上之多官能異氰酸酯之加成反應產物)、聚合物等。例如可例舉:二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯之二聚物或三聚物、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之異氰尿酸酯體(異氰尿酸酯結構之三聚物加成物)、三羥甲基丙烷與甲苯二異氰酸酯之反應產物、三羥甲基丙烷與六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之反應產物、苯二甲基二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、多亞甲基多苯基異氰酸酯、聚醚多異氰酸酯、聚酯多異氰酸酯、以及其等與各種多元醇之加成物、利用異氰尿酸酯鍵、縮二脲鍵、脲基甲酸酯鍵等而多官能化之多異氰酸酯等多官能異氰酸酯。As a preferable polyfunctional isocyanate, the polyfunctional isocyanate which has an average of 3 or more isocyanate groups per molecule can be illustrated. The isocyanate with more than 3 functions can be a multimer (such as dimer or trimer) of isocyanate with 2 or more functions, or a derivative (such as the addition reaction product of polyol and more than 2 molecules of polyfunctional isocyanate). ), polymers, etc. For example, dimer or trimer of diphenylmethane diisocyanate, isocyanurate body of hexamethylene diisocyanate (trimeric adduct of isocyanurate structure), trimeric Reaction product of methylolpropane and toluene diisocyanate, reaction product of trimethylolpropane and hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of xylylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate Trimethylolpropane adduct of hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of hexamethylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, polyether polyisocyanate, polyester polyisocyanate, and the like and various Adducts of polyols, polyfunctional isocyanates such as polyisocyanates polyfunctionalized by isocyanurate bonds, biuret bonds, allophanate bonds, and the like.

作為上述多官能異氰酸酯之市售品,可例舉:旭化成化學公司製造之商品名「Duranate TPA-100」;Tosoh公司製造之商品名「Coronate L」、「Coronate HL」、「Coronate HK」、「Coronate HX」、「Coronate 2096」;三井化學公司製造之商品名「Takenate D110N」、「Takenate D120N」、「Takenate D140N」、「Takenate D160N」等。Examples of commercial products of the above-mentioned polyfunctional isocyanates include: "Duranate TPA-100" manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemical Co., Ltd.; "Coronate L", "Coronate HL", "Coronate HK", "Coronate Coronate HX", "Coronate 2096"; trade names "Takenate D110N", "Takenate D120N", "Takenate D140N", "Takenate D160N" manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Co., Ltd.

作為環氧系交聯劑,可例舉:雙酚A、表氯醇型環氧系樹脂、伸乙基縮水甘油醚、聚乙二醇二縮水甘油醚、甘油二縮水甘油醚、甘油三縮水甘油醚、1,6-己二醇縮水甘油醚、三羥甲基丙烷三縮水甘油醚、二縮水甘油基苯胺、二胺縮水甘油胺、N,N,N',N'-四縮水甘油基間苯二甲胺及1,3-雙(N,N-二縮水甘油基胺基甲基)環己烷等。該等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Examples of epoxy-based crosslinking agents include bisphenol A, epichlorohydrin-type epoxy-based resins, ethylene glycol glycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glycerol diglycidyl ether, and glycerol triglycidyl ether. Glyceryl ether, 1,6-hexanediol glycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, diglycidyl aniline, diamine glycidyl amine, N,N,N',N'-tetraglycidyl m-xylylenediamine and 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane, etc. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

關於金屬螯合物化合物,作為金屬成分,可例舉鋁、鐵、錫、鈦、鎳等,作為螯合物成分,可例舉乙炔、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯等。該等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。The metal chelate compound includes aluminum, iron, tin, titanium, nickel, etc. as the metal component, and acetylene, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl lactate, etc., as the chelate compound. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

使用交聯劑之情形時之使用量並無特別限定,例如相對於聚合物(A)100重量份可設為超過0重量份之量。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量例如可設為0.01重量份以上,較佳為設為0.05重量份以上。藉由增大交聯劑之使用量,貼附初期之黏著力得到抑制,有二次加工性提高之傾向。有彎曲回復性、加工性優異之傾向。於若干態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量可為0.1重量份以上,可為0.5重量份以上,亦可為0.8重量份以上。另一方面,就適度容許聚合物(B)之移動性而獲得加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量通常適宜設為15重量份以下,可設為10重量份以下,亦可設為5重量份以下。The usage-amount in the case of using a crosslinking agent is not specifically limited, For example, it can be set as the quantity exceeding 0 weight part with respect to 100 weight part of polymer (A). Moreover, the usage-amount of a crosslinking agent can be 0.01 weight part or more with respect to 100 weight part of polymer (A), for example, Preferably it is 0.05 weight part or more. By increasing the amount of the crosslinking agent used, the adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment is suppressed, and the secondary processability tends to be improved. There is a tendency to be excellent in bending recovery and workability. In some aspects, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A), the amount of crosslinking agent used may be 0.1 part by weight or more, 0.5 part by weight or more, or 0.8 part by weight or more. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of appropriately allowing the mobility of the polymer (B) to obtain an increase in the adhesive force after heating, the amount of the crosslinking agent used is usually 15 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). The weight part or less may be 10 parts by weight or less, or 5 parts by weight or less.

此處所揭示之技術可以至少使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑作為交聯劑之態樣良好地實施。就兼顧貼附初期之良好二次加工性與加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量例如可設為0.01重量份以上,較佳為0.05重量份以上,更佳為0.07重量份以上,可設為0.10重量份以上,亦可設為0.15重量份以上(例如0.20重量份以上)。藉由增大異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量,可獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數,有彎曲回復性、加工性亦優異之傾向。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量例如可設為5重量份以下,較佳為未達1.0重量份,更佳為未達0.5重量份,進而較佳為未達0.3重量份,尤佳為未達0.2重量份(例如0.15重量份以下)。藉此,黏著劑之凝聚力、進而彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)適度降低,可獲得良好之彎曲保持力,且亦容易獲得加熱後之黏著力上升。The technique disclosed here can be implemented well in the aspect which uses at least an isocyanate type crosslinking agent as a crosslinking agent. From the viewpoint of achieving both good secondary processability in the initial stage of attachment and an increase in adhesive force after heating, in some aspects, the amount of the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent to be used relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be, for example, It is 0.01 part by weight or more, preferably 0.05 part by weight or more, more preferably 0.07 part by weight or more, may be 0.10 part by weight or more, and may be 0.15 part by weight or more (for example, 0.20 part by weight or more). By increasing the use amount of the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent, moderate cohesion force and elastic modulus can be obtained, and there is a tendency that bending recovery properties and processability are also excellent. In addition, the usage amount of the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent can be, for example, 5 parts by weight or less, preferably less than 1.0 parts by weight, more preferably less than 0.5 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). Preferably it is less than 0.3 weight part, More preferably, it is less than 0.2 weight part (for example, 0.15 weight part or less). Thereby, the cohesive force of the adhesive, and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus), is moderately reduced, a good bending retention force can be obtained, and an increase in the adhesive force after heating is also easily obtained.

於黏著劑層含有含羥基單體作為單體單元之構成中使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑之情形時,黏著劑層所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])例如可設為0.001以上,但並無特別限定。藉由如此增加相對於含羥基單體之異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量,黏著劑之彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)成為適宜範圍,有彎曲回復性提高之傾向。又,有加工性亦優異之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002以上,更佳為0.004以上,進而較佳為0.006以上(例如0.007以上),可為0.010以上,可為0.020以上,亦可為0.030以上。又,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])例如可設為1.0以下,亦可為0.10以下。藉由將上述莫耳比限制為規定值以下,可良好地形成適於使加熱後黏著力相對於貼附初期之黏著力大幅地上升之交聯結構。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.030以下,更佳為0.015以下,進而較佳為0.012以下(例如0.009以下),亦可為0.005以下。再者,黏著劑層中,異氰酸基與羥基可以其等之至少一部分化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。更具體而言,上述異氰酸基可以與上述羥基化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。另一方面,上述羥基可以其一部分與異氰酸基化學鍵結,另一部分不與上述異氰酸基化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。When the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent is used in the composition that the adhesive layer contains a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monomer unit, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH] of the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer ), for example, can be set to 0.001 or more, but is not particularly limited. By increasing the usage amount of the isocyanate-based crosslinking agent relative to the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in this manner, the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) of the adhesive becomes a suitable range, and the bending recovery tends to be improved. Moreover, there exists a tendency to be excellent also in workability. In some preferred aspects, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) is 0.002 or more, more preferably 0.004 or more, further preferably 0.006 or more (for example, 0.007 or more), may be 0.010 or more, may be 0.020 or more, and may be 0.030 or more. Moreover, the said molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) may be 1.0 or less, for example, and 0.10 or less may be sufficient as it. By limiting the above-mentioned molar ratio to a predetermined value or less, a cross-linked structure suitable for greatly increasing the adhesive force after heating with respect to the adhesive force in the initial stage of attachment can be favorably formed. In some preferred aspects, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) is 0.030 or less, more preferably 0.015 or less, still more preferably 0.012 or less (for example, 0.009 or less), and may also be 0.005 or less. Furthermore, in the adhesive layer, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state of chemical bonding (crosslinking) in at least a part of them. More specifically, the above-mentioned isocyanate group may exist in a chemically bonded (cross-linked) state with the above-mentioned hydroxyl group. On the other hand, a part of the hydroxyl group may be chemically bonded to the isocyanate group, and the other part may not be chemically bonded (crosslinked) to the isocyanate group.

於若干較佳態樣中,黏著劑層包含觸媒。添加觸媒之目的可為,於形成黏著劑層時促進黏著劑層之硬化,典型的是使上述任一交聯反應更有效地進行。因此,上述觸媒亦稱為硬化觸媒或交聯觸媒。藉由添加觸媒,可促進初期硬化,抑制導致黏著劑層表面產生氣泡之副反應。作為觸媒,可例舉:鐵系觸媒、錫系觸媒、鈦系觸媒、鋯系觸媒、鉛系觸媒、鈷系觸媒、鋅系觸媒等有機金屬系化合物、三級胺化合物等。其等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。其中,就反應速度與適用期之平衡而言,較佳為鐵系觸媒、錫系觸媒,尤佳為鐵系觸媒。In some preferred aspects, the adhesive layer includes a catalyst. The purpose of adding the catalyst may be to promote the hardening of the adhesive layer when forming the adhesive layer, and typically to make any of the above-mentioned cross-linking reactions proceed more efficiently. Therefore, the above-mentioned catalysts are also called hardening catalysts or cross-linking catalysts. By adding a catalyst, the initial hardening can be accelerated and the side reaction that causes bubbles on the surface of the adhesive layer can be suppressed. Examples of catalysts include organometallic compounds such as iron-based catalysts, tin-based catalysts, titanium-based catalysts, zirconium-based catalysts, lead-based catalysts, cobalt-based catalysts, and zinc-based catalysts, and tertiary catalysts. Amine compounds, etc. These and the like may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, an iron-based catalyst and a tin-based catalyst are preferable in terms of the balance between the reaction speed and the pot life, and an iron-based catalyst is particularly preferable.

作為鐵系觸媒,例如可例舉乙醯丙酮酸鐵、2-乙基己酸鐵等。鐵系觸媒可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。As the iron-based catalyst, for example, iron acetylacetonate, iron 2-ethylhexanoate, etc. may be mentioned. The iron-based catalysts may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為錫系觸媒,例如可例舉:二氯化二丁基錫、氧化二丁基錫、二溴化二丁基錫、順丁烯二酸二丁基錫、二月桂酸二丁基錫、二乙酸二丁基錫、硫化二丁基錫、三丁基甲醇錫、乙酸三丁基錫、三乙基乙醇錫、三丁基乙醇錫、氧化二辛基錫、二月桂酸二辛基錫、氯化三丁基錫、三氯乙酸三丁基錫、2-乙基己酸錫等。錫系觸媒可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Examples of the tin-based catalyst include dibutyltin dichloride, dibutyltin oxide, dibutyltin dibromide, dibutyltin maleate, dibutyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin diacetate, dibutyltin sulfide, Tributyltin methoxide, tributyltin acetate, triethyltin ethoxide, tributyltin ethoxide, dioctyltin oxide, dioctyltin dilaurate, tributyltin chloride, tributyltin trichloroacetate, 2-ethyl Tin base caproate, etc. The tin-based catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

觸媒之使用量並無特別限制,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,例如可設為0.0001重量份以上,較佳為0.001重量份以上,更佳為0.003重量份以上,進而較佳為0.006重量份以上,尤佳為0.008重量份以上。藉由使用適量觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,觸媒之使用量例如可設為1重量份以下,亦可為0.1重量份以下。於若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,觸媒之使用量為0.03重量份以下,更佳為0.02重量份以下,進而較佳為0.01重量份以下,亦可為0.005重量份以下。藉由適度限制相對於聚合物(A)100重量份之觸媒之含量,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。The usage amount of the catalyst is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 0.0001 part by weight or more, preferably 0.001 part by weight or more, more preferably 0.003 part by weight or more, and more preferably 0.006 part by weight or more, particularly preferably 0.008 part by weight or more. By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the generation of air bubbles in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, and a smooth adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Moreover, the usage-amount of a catalyst can be 1 weight part or less with respect to 100 weight part of polymer (A), for example, and 0.1 weight part or less may be sufficient as it. In some preferred aspects, relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), the usage amount of the catalyst is 0.03 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.02 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.01 parts by weight or less, or 0.005 parts by weight or less. By appropriately limiting the content of the catalyst relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), it is easy to achieve a suitable increase in adhesive force.

於黏著劑層含有含羥基單體作為單體單元之構成中使用觸媒之情形時,觸媒之使用量可設為黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為例如1.0×10 -6以上的量,係上述莫耳比較佳為1.0×10 -5以上,更佳為1.0×10 -4以上,進而較佳為2.0×10 -4以上,尤佳為3.0×10 -4以上的量,但並無特別限定。藉由使用適量觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])例如可設為5.0×10 -2以下,亦可為5.0×10 -3以下。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為3.0×10 -3以下,更佳為1.0×10 -3以下,進而較佳為5.0×10 -4以下,亦可為3.0×10 -4以下。藉由適度限制觸媒之含量,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。 When a catalyst is used in the composition that the adhesive layer contains a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monomer unit, the amount of the catalyst used can be set as the molar ratio of the catalyst contained in the adhesive layer to the hydroxyl group ([catalyst] /[OH]) is, for example, 1.0×10 -6 or more, and the above molar ratio is preferably 1.0×10 -5 or more, more preferably 1.0×10 -4 or more, and still more preferably 2.0×10 -4 or more , 3.0×10 −4 or more is particularly preferable, but it is not particularly limited. By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the generation of air bubbles in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, and a smooth adhesive surface can be easily obtained. In addition, the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) may be, for example, 5.0×10 −2 or less, or 5.0×10 −3 or less. In some preferred aspects, the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) is 3.0×10 -3 or less, more preferably 1.0×10 -3 or less, and still more preferably 5.0×10 -4 or less , may be 3.0×10 -4 or less. By appropriately limiting the content of the catalyst, it is easy to achieve a suitable increase in adhesion.

(黏著賦予樹脂) 黏著劑層中可視需要含有黏著賦予樹脂。作為黏著賦予樹脂,並無特別限制,例如可例舉:松香系黏著賦予樹脂、萜烯系黏著賦予樹脂、酚系黏著賦予樹脂、烴系黏著賦予樹脂、酮系黏著賦予樹脂、聚醯胺系黏著賦予樹脂、環氧系黏著賦予樹脂、彈性體系黏著賦予樹脂等。黏著賦予樹脂可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 (Adhesion imparting resin) An adhesion-imparting resin may be contained in the adhesive layer as needed. The adhesion-imparting resin is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rosin-based adhesion-imparting resins, terpene-based adhesion-imparting resins, phenol-based adhesion-imparting resins, hydrocarbon-based adhesion-imparting resins, ketone-based adhesion-imparting resins, and polyamide-based adhesion-imparting resins. Adhesion imparting resin, epoxy-based adhesion imparting resin, elastic system adhesion imparting resin, etc. The adhesion-imparting resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

黏著賦予樹脂之含量並無特別限定,可以根據目的或用途而發揮適當之黏著性能之方式設定。相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,黏著賦予樹脂之含量(於含有兩種以上之黏著賦予樹脂之情形時為其等之合計量)例如可設為5~500重量份左右。又,此處所揭示之技術可以限制黏著賦予樹脂之使用量之態樣良好地實施。例如相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,黏著賦予樹脂之含量可設為未達20重量份,可未達10重量份,可未達3重量份,可未達1重量份(0重量份~未達1重量份),於若干態樣中,黏著劑層實質上不含黏著賦予樹脂。The content of the adhesion-imparting resin is not particularly limited, and can be set in such a way that appropriate adhesion performance is exhibited according to the purpose or application. The content of the adhesion-imparting resin (when two or more types of adhesion-imparting resins are contained, the total amount thereof) can be, for example, about 5 to 500 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). Moreover, the technique disclosed here can be implemented well in the aspect which restricts the usage-amount of the adhesion-imparting resin. For example, relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), the content of the adhesion imparting resin can be set to less than 20 parts by weight, less than 10 parts by weight, less than 3 parts by weight, less than 1 part by weight (0 parts by weight) ~ less than 1 part by weight), in some aspects, the adhesive layer is substantially free of adhesion-imparting resin.

此外,此處所揭示之技術中之黏著劑層亦可於不明顯妨礙本發明之效果之範圍內,視需要含有調平劑、塑化劑、軟化劑、著色劑(染料、顏料等)、填充劑、抗靜電劑、抗老化劑、紫外線吸收劑、抗氧化劑、光穩定劑、防腐劑等可用於黏著劑之公知添加劑。In addition, the adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein may also contain leveling agents, plasticizers, softeners, colorants (dyes, pigments, etc.), fillers, as necessary, within the range that does not significantly hinder the effects of the present invention. Antistatic agents, anti-aging agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, preservatives, etc. can be used as well-known additives for adhesives.

此處所揭示之構成補強用膜之黏著劑層可為黏著劑組合物之硬化層。即,該黏著劑層可藉由將水分散型、溶劑型、光硬化型、熱熔型等黏著劑組合物賦予(例如塗佈)至適當表面後適當實施硬化處理而形成。於進行兩種以上之硬化處理(乾燥、交聯、聚合、冷卻等)之情形時,該等可同時、或多階段地進行。於使用單體原料之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)之黏著劑組合物中,典型而言,作為上述硬化處理,進行最終之共聚反應。即,將部分聚合物供於進一步之共聚反應而形成完全聚合物。例如,若為光硬化性黏著劑組合物,則實施光照射。視需要亦可實施交聯、乾燥等硬化處理。例如於必須以光硬化性黏著劑組合物進行乾燥之情形時,於乾燥後進行光硬化即可。於使用完全聚合物之黏著劑組合物中,典型而言,作為上述硬化處理,視需要實施乾燥(加熱乾燥)、交聯等處理。The adhesive layer constituting the reinforcing film disclosed herein may be a hardened layer of the adhesive composition. That is, the adhesive layer can be formed by applying (for example, coating) an adhesive composition such as a water-dispersed, solvent-based, photocurable, and hot-melt-type adhesive composition to an appropriate surface and then appropriately performing a curing treatment. In the case of performing two or more hardening treatments (drying, cross-linking, polymerization, cooling, etc.), these may be performed simultaneously or in multiple stages. In an adhesive composition using a partial polymer (polymer slurry) of a monomer raw material, a final copolymerization reaction is typically performed as the above-mentioned curing treatment. That is, a partial polymer is subjected to further copolymerization to form a complete polymer. For example, in the case of a photocurable adhesive composition, light irradiation is performed. If necessary, curing treatment such as crosslinking and drying may be performed. For example, when it is necessary to dry with a photocurable adhesive composition, photocuring may be performed after drying. In an adhesive composition using a complete polymer, typically, as the above-mentioned curing treatment, treatments such as drying (heat drying) and crosslinking are performed as necessary.

黏著劑組合物之塗佈例如可使用凹版輥式塗佈機、逆輥塗佈機、接觸輥塗佈機、浸漬輥塗機、棒式塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、噴霧塗佈機等常用之塗佈機而實施。For the application of the adhesive composition, for example, a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a touch roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, a spray coater, etc. can be used. It is implemented with a commonly used coating machine.

黏著劑層之厚度並無特別限定,例如可設為6 μm以上。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之厚度可為8 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為15 μm以上,亦可為20 μm以上或超過20 μm。藉由增大黏著劑層之厚度,有加熱後黏著力上升之傾向。又,於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之厚度例如可為300 μm以下,可為200 μm以下,可為150 μm以下,可為100 μm以下,可為70 μm以下,可為50 μm以下,亦可為40 μm以下。黏著劑層之厚度不過大就補強用膜之薄型化或防止黏著劑層之凝聚破壞等觀點而言可變得有利。具有厚度為上述範圍內之黏著劑層之補強用膜可實現黏著力等黏著特性或彎曲回復性、彎曲保持力之平衡。再者,於基材之第一面及第二面具有第一黏著劑層及第二黏著劑層之補強用膜之情形時,上述黏著劑層之厚度至少可適用於第一黏著劑層之厚度。第二黏著劑層之厚度亦可從相同之範圍選擇。又,於無基材之補強用膜之情形時,該補強用膜之厚度與黏著劑層之厚度一致。The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but can be set to, for example, 6 μm or more. In some aspects, the thickness of the adhesive layer may be greater than 8 μm, greater than 10 μm, greater than or equal to 15 μm, greater than or equal to 20 μm, or greater than 20 μm. By increasing the thickness of the adhesive layer, the adhesive force tends to increase after heating. Also, in some aspects, the thickness of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 300 μm or less, 200 μm or less, 150 μm or less, 100 μm or less, 70 μm or less, 50 μm or less, It may be 40 μm or less. If the thickness of the adhesive layer is not too large, it can be advantageous from the viewpoints of thinning of the reinforcing film and prevention of cohesion failure of the adhesive layer. A reinforcing film having an adhesive layer having a thickness within the above-mentioned range can achieve a balance of adhesive properties such as adhesive force, or flexural recovery and flexural retention. Furthermore, when the first and second surfaces of the base material are provided with reinforcing films for the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer, the thickness of the above-mentioned adhesive layer is at least suitable for the thickness of the first adhesive layer. thickness. The thickness of the second adhesive layer can also be selected from the same range. Furthermore, in the case of a reinforcing film without a base material, the thickness of the reinforcing film is the same as the thickness of the adhesive layer.

<支持基材> 若干態樣之補強用膜可為於支持基材之單面或雙面具備黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態。支持基材之材質並無特別限定,可根據補強用膜之使用目的或使用態樣等適當選擇。作為可使用之基材之非限定例,可例舉:塑膠膜等樹脂膜;聚胺基甲酸酯發泡體、聚乙烯發泡體、聚氯丁二烯發泡體等發泡體所構成之發泡體片材;各種纖維狀物質(可為麻、棉等天然纖維、聚酯、維尼綸等合成纖維、乙酸酯等半合成纖維等)之單一體或利用混紡等所形成之織布及不織布;日本紙、道林紙、牛皮紙、皺紋紙等紙類;鋁箔、銅箔等金屬箔等。亦可為由該等複合而成之構成之基材。作為此種複合基材之例,例如可例舉:積層有金屬箔與上述塑膠膜之結構之基材、玻璃布等經無機纖維強化之塑膠基材等。 <Supporting substrate> The reinforcing film of some aspects may be in the form of a substrate-attached adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer on one side or both sides of the support substrate. The material of the support substrate is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected according to the purpose of use of the reinforcing film, the state of use, and the like. Non-limiting examples of substrates that can be used include resin films such as plastic films; foams such as polyurethane foams, polyethylene foams, and polychloroprene foams. Formed foam sheet; various fibrous substances (can be natural fibers such as hemp, cotton, synthetic fibers such as polyester and vinylon, semi-synthetic fibers such as acetate, etc.) or formed by blending, etc. Woven and non-woven fabrics; Japanese paper, Dowling paper, kraft paper, crepe paper and other papers; aluminum foil, copper foil and other metal foils, etc. A base material composed of these composites may also be used. As an example of such a composite base material, the base material of the structure which laminated|stacked metal foil and the said plastic film, the plastic base material reinforced with inorganic fibers, such as glass cloth, can be mentioned, for example.

作為此處所揭示之補強用膜之基材,可良好地使用各種膜基材。上述膜基材可為如發泡體膜或不織布片材等般多孔質之基材,可為非多孔質之基材,亦可為積層有多孔質層與非多孔質層之結構之基材。於若干態樣中,作為上述膜基材,可良好地使用包含能夠獨立地維持形狀之(自立型或非相關性之)樹脂膜作為基底膜者。此處所謂「樹脂膜」係指非多孔質之結構,且典型而言係指實質上不含氣泡之(無孔隙之)樹脂膜。因此,上述樹脂膜之概念區別於發泡體膜或不織布。作為上述樹脂膜,可良好地使用能夠獨立地維持形狀(自立型、或非相關性)者。上述樹脂膜可為單層結構,亦可為兩層以上之多層結構(例如三層結構)。As a base material of the reinforcement film disclosed here, various film base materials can be used favorably. The above-mentioned film substrate may be a porous substrate such as a foamed film or a non-woven sheet, a non-porous substrate, or a substrate having a structure in which a porous layer and a non-porous layer are laminated. . In some aspects, as the above-mentioned film substrate, a resin film including a (self-supporting or unrelated) resin film capable of independently maintaining a shape can be suitably used as a base film. The term "resin film" here refers to a non-porous structure, and typically refers to a resin film substantially free of air bubbles (non-porous). Therefore, the concept of the above-mentioned resin film is distinguished from a foamed film or a nonwoven fabric. As said resin film, the thing which can maintain a shape independently (self-supporting type, or non-correlation) can be used suitably. The above-mentioned resin film may be a single-layer structure, or may be a multi-layer structure of two or more layers (eg, a three-layer structure).

作為構成樹脂膜之樹脂材料,例如可例舉:聚酯、聚烯烴、尼龍6、尼龍66、部分芳香族聚醯胺等聚醯胺(PA)、聚醯亞胺(PI)、聚醯胺醯亞胺(PAI)、聚醚醚酮(PEEK)、聚醚碸(PES)、聚苯硫醚(PPS)、聚碳酸酯(PC)、聚胺基甲酸酯(PU)、乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物(EVA)、聚四氟乙烯(PTFE)等氟樹脂、丙烯酸系樹脂、聚丙烯酸酯、聚苯乙烯、聚氯乙烯、聚偏二氯乙烯等樹脂。上述樹脂膜可為使用單獨含有此種樹脂之一種之樹脂材料所形成者,亦可為使用摻合有兩種以上之樹脂材料所形成者。上述樹脂膜可未經延伸,亦可為經延伸(例如單軸延伸或雙軸延伸)者。Examples of the resin material constituting the resin film include polyester, polyolefin, nylon 6, nylon 66, polyamide (PA) such as partially aromatic polyamide, polyimide (PI), polyamide Imide (PAI), Polyetheretherketone (PEEK), Polyetheretherketone (PES), Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS), Polycarbonate (PC), Polyurethane (PU), Ethylene Acetic Acid Fluorine resins such as vinyl ester copolymer (EVA) and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), acrylic resins, polyacrylates, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, and other resins. The above-mentioned resin film may be formed using a resin material containing one of such resins alone, or may be formed using two or more resin materials blended. The above-mentioned resin film may be unstretched or stretched (for example, uniaxially stretched or biaxially stretched).

作為構成樹脂膜之樹脂材料之較佳例,可例舉聚醯亞胺系樹脂、聚酯系樹脂、PPS樹脂及聚烯烴系樹脂。此處,聚醯亞胺系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚醯亞胺之樹脂。同樣,聚酯系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚酯之樹脂,PPS樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有PPS之樹脂,聚烯烴系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚烯烴之樹脂。As a preferable example of the resin material which comprises a resin film, a polyimide-type resin, a polyester-type resin, a PPS resin, and a polyolefin-type resin are mentioned. Here, the polyimide-based resin refers to a resin containing polyimide in a ratio exceeding 50% by weight. Likewise, polyester-based resins refer to resins containing polyester in a ratio of more than 50 wt %, PPS resins refer to resins containing PPS in a ratio of more than 50 wt %, and polyolefin-based resins refer to resins containing more than 50 wt % Resins containing polyolefins.

作為聚酯系樹脂之具體例,可例舉:聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯(PBT)、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯(PEN)、聚萘二甲酸丁二酯等。Specific examples of polyester-based resins include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and polyethylene naphthalate. Butylene diformate, etc.

作為聚烯烴樹脂,可單獨使用一種聚烯烴、或將兩種以上之聚烯烴組合而使用。該聚烯烴例如可為α-烯烴之均聚物、兩種以上之α-烯烴之共聚物、一種或兩種以上之α-烯烴與其他乙烯基單體之共聚物等。作為具體例,可例舉:聚乙烯(PE)、聚丙烯(PP)、聚-1-丁烯、聚-4-甲基-1-戊烯、乙烯丙烯橡膠(EPR)等乙烯-丙烯共聚物、乙烯-丙烯-丁烯共聚物、乙烯-丁烯共聚物、乙烯-乙烯醇共聚物、乙烯-丙烯酸乙酯共聚物等。可使用低密度(LD)聚烯烴及高密度(HD)聚烯烴之任一者。作為聚烯烴樹脂膜之例,可例舉:未延伸聚丙烯(CPP)膜、雙軸延伸聚丙烯(OPP)膜、低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)膜、直鏈狀低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)膜、中密度聚乙烯(MDPE)膜、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)膜、摻合有兩種以上之聚乙烯(PE)之聚乙烯(PE)膜、摻合有聚丙烯(PP)與聚乙烯(PE)之PP/PE摻合膜等。As the polyolefin resin, one type of polyolefin may be used alone, or two or more types of polyolefin may be used in combination. The polyolefin can be, for example, a homopolymer of α-olefin, a copolymer of two or more α-olefins, a copolymer of one or more α-olefins and other vinyl monomers, and the like. Specific examples include ethylene-propylene copolymers such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), poly-1-butene, poly-4-methyl-1-pentene, and ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR). ethylene-propylene-butene copolymer, ethylene-butene copolymer, ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer, etc. Either low density (LD) polyolefins and high density (HD) polyolefins can be used. Examples of polyolefin resin films include unstretched polypropylene (CPP) films, biaxially stretched polypropylene (OPP) films, low-density polyethylene (LDPE) films, and linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) films. Film, medium density polyethylene (MDPE) film, high density polyethylene (HDPE) film, polyethylene (PE) film blended with two or more polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) film blended Ethylene (PE) PP/PE blended film, etc.

作為可良好地用作此處所揭示之補強用膜之基底膜之樹脂膜之具體例,可例舉PI膜、PET膜、PEN膜、PPS膜、PEEK膜、CPP膜及OPP膜。As a specific example of the resin film which can be suitably used as the base film of the film for reinforcement disclosed here, a PI film, a PET film, a PEN film, a PPS film, a PEEK film, a CPP film, and an OPP film are mentioned.

於樹脂膜中,可於不明顯妨礙本發明之效果之範圍內,視需要調配光穩定劑、抗氧化劑、抗靜電劑、著色劑(染料、顏料等)、填充材、滑澤劑、抗黏連劑等公知之添加劑。添加劑之調配量並無特別限定,可根據目的等適當設定。In the resin film, light stabilizers, antioxidants, antistatic agents, colorants (dyes, pigments, etc.), fillers, lubricating agents, anti-sticking agents, etc. can be formulated as necessary within the range that does not significantly hinder the effects of the present invention. well-known additives such as linking agents. The compounding quantity of an additive is not specifically limited, According to the objective etc., it can set suitably.

樹脂膜之製造方法並無特別限定。例如可適當採用擠出成形、吹脹成形、T模壓鑄成形、砑光輥成形等先前公知之一般之樹脂膜成形方法。The manufacturing method of a resin film is not specifically limited. For example, conventionally known general resin film forming methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die die casting, and calender roll molding can be suitably employed.

上述基材可為實質上由此種基底膜構成者。或者,上述基材亦可為除了包含上述基底膜以外,還包含輔助層者。作為上述輔助層之例,可例舉:光學特性調整層(例如著色層、抗反射層)、用以對基材賦予所需之外觀之印刷層或層壓層、抗靜電層、底塗層、剝離層等表面處理層。The said base material may consist of such a base film substantially. Alternatively, the above-mentioned base material may include an auxiliary layer in addition to the above-mentioned base film. Examples of the above-mentioned auxiliary layers include: optical property adjustment layers (such as coloring layers, antireflection layers), printing layers or lamination layers for imparting desired appearance to substrates, antistatic layers, primer layers , peeling layer and other surface treatment layers.

基材之厚度並無特別限定,可根據補強用膜之使用目的或使用態樣等而選擇。基材之厚度例如可為1000 μm以下。於若干態樣中,就補強用膜之操作性或加工性之觀點而言,基材之厚度例如可為500 μm以下,可為300 μm以下,可為250 μm以下,亦可為200 μm以下。就應用補強用膜之製品之小型化或輕量化之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,基材之厚度例如可為160 μm以下,可為130 μm以下,可為100 μm以下,可為90 μm以下,可為80 μm以下,可為60 μm以下,可為50 μm以下,可為25 μm以下,可為10 μm以下,亦可為5 μm以下。若基材之厚度變小,則有補強用膜之柔軟性或對被黏著體之表面形狀之追隨性提高之傾向。又,就操作性或加工性等觀點而言,基材之厚度例如可為2 μm以上,可為5 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,亦可為25 μm以上或超過25 μm。於若干態樣中,基材之厚度例如可為30 μm以上,可為35 μm以上,可為55 μm以上,可為70 μm以上,可為75 μm以上,可為90 μm以上,亦可為120 μm以上。例如,補強用膜中可良好地採用厚度30 μm以上之基材。The thickness of the base material is not particularly limited, and can be selected according to the purpose of use of the reinforcing film, the state of use, and the like. The thickness of the base material may be, for example, 1000 μm or less. In some aspects, the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 500 μm or less, 300 μm or less, 250 μm or less, or 200 μm or less, from the viewpoint of the handleability or processability of the reinforcing film. . From the viewpoint of miniaturization or weight reduction of products to which the reinforcing film is applied, in some aspects, the thickness of the substrate may be, for example, 160 μm or less, 130 μm or less, 100 μm or less, or 90 μm or less. μm or less, 80 μm or less, 60 μm or less, 50 μm or less, 25 μm or less, 10 μm or less, or 5 μm or less. When the thickness of the base material becomes smaller, the flexibility of the reinforcing film or the followability to the surface shape of the adherend tends to increase. In addition, from the viewpoint of workability and workability, the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 2 μm or more, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, or 25 μm or more or more. 25 μm. In some aspects, the thickness of the substrate can be, for example, 30 μm or more, 35 μm or more, 55 μm or more, 70 μm or more, 75 μm or more, 90 μm or more, or 120 μm or more. For example, a base material having a thickness of 30 μm or more can be suitably used for the reinforcing film.

視需要亦可對基材之第一面實施電暈放電處理、電漿處理、紫外線照射處理、酸處理、鹼處理、利用底塗劑(primer)之塗佈形成底塗層等先前公知之表面處理。此種表面處理可為用於提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性之處理。例如於具備含有樹脂膜作為基底膜之基材之補強用膜中,可良好地採用實施了該抓固性提高處理之基材。上述表面處理可單獨應用或組合應用。底塗層之形成所使用之底塗劑之組成並無特別限定,可自公知者中適當選擇。底塗層之厚度並無特別限制,通常適宜為0.01 μm~1 μm左右,較佳為0.1 μm~1 μm左右。作為視需要可對基材之第一面實施之其他處理,可例舉抗靜電層形成處理、著色層形成處理、印刷處理等。If necessary, corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, coating with a primer (primer) to form a primer layer and other previously known surfaces can also be performed on the first surface of the substrate. deal with. Such surface treatment may be a treatment for improving the grip of the adhesive layer to the substrate. For example, in the reinforcement film provided with the base material which contains a resin film as a base film, the base material which performed this grip property improvement process can be used favorably. The above surface treatments can be applied individually or in combination. The composition of the primer used for the formation of the primer layer is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known ones. The thickness of the undercoat layer is not particularly limited, and is usually suitably about 0.01 μm to 1 μm, preferably about 0.1 μm to 1 μm. As another process which can be performed with respect to the 1st surface of a base material as needed, an antistatic layer formation process, a colored layer formation process, a printing process, etc. are mentioned.

於此處所揭示之補強用膜為僅於基材之第一面具有黏著劑層之單面黏著片材之形態之情形時,亦可對基材之第二面視需要實施剝離處理或抗靜電處理等先前公知之表面處理。例如可藉由利用剝離處理劑對基材背面進行表面處理(典型而言,藉由設置利用剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層),而使捲繞成捲筒狀之形態之補強用膜之解卷力變輕。作為剝離處理劑,可使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑、長鏈烷基系剝離處理劑、烯烴系剝離處理劑、氟系剝離處理劑、脂肪酸醯胺系剝離處理劑、硫化鉬、二氧化矽粉等。又,亦可以提高印字性、降低光反射性、提高重疊貼合性等為目的,對基材之第二面實施電暈放電處理、電漿處理、紫外線照射處理、酸處理、鹼處理等處理。又,於雙面黏著片材之情形時,視需要亦可對基材之第二面實施與作為可對基材之第一面實施之表面處理於上文中所例示者相同之表面處理。再者,對基材之第一面實施之表面處理與對第二面實施之表面處理可相同亦可不同。When the reinforcing film disclosed here is in the form of a single-sided adhesive sheet with an adhesive layer only on the first side of the base material, the second side of the base material can also be subjected to peeling treatment or antistatic treatment as required. Treatment and other previously known surface treatments. For example, by surface-treating the back surface of the base material with a peeling agent (typically, by providing a peeling layer formed with a peeling agent), the reinforcing film in the form of a roll can be disassembled. The roll force becomes lighter. As the release treatment agent, polysiloxane-based release treatment agent, long-chain alkyl-based release treatment agent, olefin-based release treatment agent, fluorine-based release treatment agent, fatty acid amide-based release treatment agent, molybdenum sulfide, silicon dioxide can be used. powder, etc. Furthermore, corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, etc. may also be applied to the second surface of the base material for the purpose of improving printability, reducing light reflectivity, and improving lamination properties. . Furthermore, in the case of a double-sided adhesive sheet, the second surface of the base material may be subjected to the same surface treatment as exemplified above as the surface treatment that can be applied to the first surface of the base material, if necessary. In addition, the surface treatment performed on the first surface of the base material and the surface treatment performed on the second surface may be the same or different.

<補強用膜之特性> 此處所揭示之補強用膜較佳為將在貼合於不鏽鋼鋼板且於23℃下保持30分鐘後測得之初期黏著力N 23限制為規定值以下。於若干態樣中,黏著力N 23例如較佳為未達500 gf/25 mm,更佳為未達400 gf/25 mm,進而較佳為未達300 gf/25 mm,尤佳為250 gf/25 mm以下(例如200 gf/25 mm以下),亦可為150 gf/25 mm以下。黏著力N 23較低就二次加工性之觀點而言較佳。黏著力N 23之下限並無特別限制,例如可為1 gf/25 mm以上。就貼附於被黏著體之作業性、或防止黏著力上升前之位置偏移等觀點而言,黏著力N 23通常適宜為10 gf/25 mm以上。就提高加熱後黏著力等觀點而言,於若干態樣中,黏著力N 23例如可為20 gf/25 mm以上,可為50 gf/25 mm以上,可為80 gf/25 mm以上,亦可為100 gf/25 mm以上(例如150 gf/25 mm以上)。 <Characteristics of Reinforcing Film> In the reinforcing film disclosed here, it is preferable that the initial adhesive force N 23 measured after being bonded to a stainless steel sheet and kept at 23° C. for 30 minutes is limited to a predetermined value or less. In some aspects, the adhesion N 23 is, for example, preferably less than 500 gf/25 mm, more preferably less than 400 gf/25 mm, more preferably less than 300 gf/25 mm, especially preferably 250 gf /25 mm or less (for example, 200 gf/25 mm or less), or 150 gf/25 mm or less. It is preferable from the viewpoint of secondary workability that the adhesive force N 23 is lower. The lower limit of the adhesive force N 23 is not particularly limited, for example, it may be 1 gf/25 mm or more. Adhesion force N 23 is generally suitable to be 10 gf/25 mm or more from the viewpoint of workability of attaching to an adherend or preventing positional displacement before the adhesive force increases. From the viewpoint of improving the adhesion after heating, etc., in some aspects, the adhesion N 23 may be, for example, 20 gf/25 mm or more, 50 gf/25 mm or more, 80 gf/25 mm or more, or more. Can be over 100 gf/25 mm (eg over 150 gf/25 mm).

黏著力N 23[gf/25 mm]係藉由如下方式獲得,即,在壓接於作為被黏著體之不鏽鋼(SUS)板且於23℃、50%RH之環境下放置30分鐘後,於相同環境下(即23℃下),在剝離角度180度、拉伸速度300 mm/min之條件下測定180°剝離黏著力。被黏著體可使用SUS304BA板。測定時,可視需要於測定對象之補強用膜貼附適當之襯底材(例如厚度25 μm左右之PET膜)進行補強。黏著力N 23更具體而言可依據下述實施例所記載之初期黏著力之測定方法進行測定。 Adhesion force N 23 [gf/25 mm] was obtained by crimping a stainless steel (SUS) plate as an adherend and standing for 30 minutes in an environment of 23°C and 50% RH, Under the same environment (ie, at 23°C), the 180° peel adhesion was measured under the conditions of a peel angle of 180 degrees and a tensile speed of 300 mm/min. The adherend can use SUS304BA board. During the measurement, a suitable backing material (for example, a PET film with a thickness of about 25 μm) may be attached to the reinforcing film of the measurement object as necessary for reinforcement. More specifically, the adhesive force N 23 can be measured according to the measurement method of the initial adhesive force described in the following examples.

此處所揭示之補強用膜係藉由加熱使黏著力上升者,例如可為黏著力N 60、即在貼合於不鏽鋼鋼板且於60℃下保持60分鐘後在23℃下測得之黏著力顯示300 gf/25 mm以上者。於若干態樣中,黏著力N 60為400 gf/25 mm以上,適宜為500 gf/25 mm以上。滿足該特性之補強用膜在貼附於被黏著體後,藉由加熱使黏著力上升至規定值以上。根據此處所揭示之技術,可藉由加熱獲得強黏著力。於若干較佳態樣中,黏著力N 60為600 gf/25 mm以上,更佳為700 gf/25 mm以上,可為800 gf/25 mm以上,亦可為900 gf/25 mm以上。黏著力N 60之上限並無特別限制。就補強用膜之製造容易性或經濟性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,黏著力N 60例如可為3000 gf/25 mm以下,可為1500 gf/25 mm以下,亦可為1000 gf/25 mm以下。 The reinforcing film disclosed herein can increase the adhesive force by heating, for example, the adhesive force N 60 , that is, the adhesive force measured at 23° C. after being attached to a stainless steel plate and kept at 60° C. for 60 minutes. Displays over 300 gf/25 mm. In some aspects, the adhesion N 60 is 400 gf/25 mm or more, preferably 500 gf/25 mm or more. The reinforcing film satisfying this characteristic is attached to the adherend, and the adhesive force is increased to a predetermined value or more by heating. According to the techniques disclosed herein, strong adhesion can be achieved by heating. In some preferred aspects, the adhesive force N 60 is 600 gf/25 mm or more, more preferably 700 gf/25 mm or more, may be 800 gf/25 mm or more, or 900 gf/25 mm or more. The upper limit of the adhesive force N 60 is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of ease of manufacture or economy of the reinforcing film, in some aspects, the adhesion N 60 may be, for example, 3000 gf/25 mm or less, 1500 gf/25 mm or less, or 1000 gf /25 mm or less.

黏著力N 60[gf/25 mm]係藉由如下方式獲得,即,在壓接於作為被黏著體之SUS板且在60℃環境下保持60分鐘,繼而於23℃、50%RH之環境下放置30分鐘,其後於相同環境下,在剝離角度180度、拉伸速度300 mm/min之條件下測定180°剝離黏著力。與黏著力N 23同樣,被黏著體可使用SUS304BA板。測定時,可視需要於測定對象之補強用膜貼附適當之襯底材(例如厚度25 μm左右之PET膜)進行補強。黏著力N 60更具體而言可依據下述實施例所記載之加熱後黏著力之測定方法進行測定。 The adhesive force N 60 [gf/25 mm] was obtained by pressing the SUS plate as the adherend and holding it for 60 minutes in an environment of 60°C, and then in an environment of 23°C and 50% RH. It was left to stand for 30 minutes, and then the 180° peel adhesion was measured under the conditions of a peel angle of 180 degrees and a tensile speed of 300 mm/min in the same environment. Similar to Adhesion N 23 , SUS304BA board can be used for the adherend. During the measurement, a suitable backing material (for example, a PET film with a thickness of about 25 μm) may be attached to the reinforcing film of the measurement object as necessary for reinforcement. More specifically, the adhesive force N 60 can be measured according to the method for measuring the adhesive force after heating described in the following examples.

黏著力N 60[gf/25 mm]相對於黏著力N 23[gf/25 mm]之比、即黏著力上升比N 60/N 23並無特別限定,於若干態樣中,N 60/N 23適宜為1.5以上,較佳為2.0以上,更佳為2.5以上,進而較佳為3.0以上(例如3.5以上),亦可超過5.0(例如超過7.0)。藉由N 60/N 23較大之補強用膜,可於貼附初期顯示良好之二次加工性,且藉由其後之加熱等使黏著力大幅地上升。N 60/N 23之上限並無特別限定,通常為100以下,就補強用膜之製造容易性或經濟性之觀點而言,可為30以下,可為15以下,亦可為10以下。於若干態樣中,N 60/N 23例如可為5以下,可為3以下,亦可為2以下。 The ratio of the adhesion force N 60 [gf/25 mm] to the adhesion force N 23 [gf/25 mm], that is, the adhesion force increase ratio N 60 /N 23 is not particularly limited. In some aspects, N 60 /N 23 is preferably 1.5 or more, preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 2.5 or more, still more preferably 3.0 or more (eg, 3.5 or more), and may exceed 5.0 (eg, more than 7.0). With the reinforcing film having a large N 60 /N 23 , good secondary workability can be exhibited in the initial stage of attachment, and the adhesive force can be greatly increased by subsequent heating or the like. The upper limit of N 60 /N 23 is not particularly limited, but is usually 100 or less, and may be 30 or less, 15 or less, or 10 or less from the viewpoint of the easiness of manufacture of the reinforcing film and economical efficiency. In some aspects, N 60 /N 23 may be, for example, 5 or less, 3 or less, or 2 or less.

再者,此處所揭示之補強用膜之加熱後黏著力表示該補強用膜之一特性,並非限定該補強用膜之使用態樣。換言之,此處所揭示之補強用膜之使用態樣並不限定於在60℃下進行60分鐘加熱之態樣,例如亦可於不特別進行加熱至室溫區域(通常為20℃~30℃,典型為23℃~25℃)以上之處理的態樣中使用。於該使用態樣中,黏著力亦長時間上升,可實現牢固之接合。又,此處所揭示之補強用膜可藉由在貼附後之任意時刻於超過30℃(例如50~70℃左右)或高於60℃之溫度下進行加熱處理而促進黏著力之上升。該加熱處理中之加熱溫度並無特別限定,可考慮作業性、經濟性、補強用膜之基材或被黏著體之耐熱性等來設定。上述加熱溫度例如可未達150℃,可為120℃以下,可為100℃以下,可為80℃以下,亦可為70℃以下。又,上述加熱溫度例如可設為40℃以上、45℃以上、50℃以上、55℃以上、60℃以上、或70℃以上,可設為80℃以上,亦可設為100℃以上。加熱時間並無特別限定,例如可為3小時以下,可為1小時以下,可為30分鐘以下,亦可為10分鐘以下。又,加熱時間例如可為1分鐘以上,可為15分鐘以上,可為30分鐘以上,亦可為1小時以上。或者,亦可於補強用膜或被黏著體不發生顯著之熱劣化之限度內進行更長時間之加熱處理。再者,加熱處理可一次性進行,亦可分成複數次進行。Furthermore, the adhesive force after heating of the reinforcing film disclosed herein represents a characteristic of the reinforcing film, and does not limit the usage of the reinforcing film. In other words, the use state of the reinforcing film disclosed here is not limited to the state of heating at 60°C for 60 minutes. Typically, it is used in the form of treatment above 23°C to 25°C). In this state of use, the adhesive force is also increased for a long time, and a firm joint can be realized. In addition, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be heated at a temperature exceeding 30° C. (eg, about 50 to 70° C.) or higher than 60° C. at any time after attachment to promote an increase in adhesion. The heating temperature in this heat treatment is not particularly limited, and can be set in consideration of workability, economical efficiency, the heat resistance of the base material of the reinforcing film or the adherend, and the like. The above-mentioned heating temperature may be less than 150°C, for example, 120°C or lower, 100°C or lower, 80°C or lower, or 70°C or lower. Moreover, the said heating temperature can be 40 degreeC or more, 45 degreeC or more, 50 degreeC or more, 55 degreeC or more, 60 degreeC or more, or 70 degreeC or more, for example, 80 degreeC or more, and 100 degreeC or more. The heating time is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 3 hours or less, 1 hour or less, 30 minutes or less, or 10 minutes or less. Moreover, the heating time may be, for example, 1 minute or more, 15 minutes or more, 30 minutes or more, or 1 hour or more. Alternatively, the heat treatment for a longer period of time may be performed within the limit that the reinforcing film or the adherend does not undergo significant thermal degradation. In addition, the heat treatment may be performed at one time, or may be performed in a plurality of times.

<附基材之補強用膜> 於此處所揭示之補強用膜為附基材之黏著片材之形態之情形時,該補強用膜之厚度例如可為1000 μm以下,可為600 μm以下,可為350 μm以下,亦可為250 μm以下。就應用補強用膜之製品之小型化、輕量化、薄型化等觀點而言,於若干態樣中,補強用膜之厚度例如可為200 μm以下,可為175 μm以下,可為140 μm以下,可為120 μm以下,亦可為100 μm以下(例如未達100 μm)。又,就操作性等觀點而言,補強用膜之厚度例如可為5 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為15 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,可為25 μm以上,亦可為30 μm以上。於若干態樣中,補強用膜之厚度例如可為50 μm以上,可為60 μm以上,可為80 μm以上,可為100 μm以上,亦可為120 μm以上。補強用膜之厚度之上限並無特別限定。 再者,補強用膜之厚度係指貼附於被黏著體之部分之厚度。例如圖1所示之構成之補強用膜1中,係指補強用膜1之黏著面21A至基材10之第二面10B為止之厚度,不包括剝離襯墊31之厚度。 <Reinforcing film with base material> When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is in the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 1000 μm or less, 600 μm or less, 350 μm or less, or 250 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization, weight reduction, and thinning of products to which the reinforcing film is applied, in some aspects, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 200 μm or less, 175 μm or less, or 140 μm or less. , which may be 120 μm or less, or 100 μm or less (for example, less than 100 μm). Moreover, from the viewpoint of workability and the like, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or 30 μm or more. μm or more. In some aspects, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 50 μm or more, 60 μm or more, 80 μm or more, 100 μm or more, or 120 μm or more. The upper limit of the thickness of the reinforcement film is not specifically limited. Further, the thickness of the reinforcing film refers to the thickness of the part attached to the adherend. For example, in the reinforcing film 1 having the structure shown in FIG. 1 , it refers to the thickness from the adhesive surface 21A of the reinforcing film 1 to the second surface 10B of the substrate 10 , excluding the thickness of the release liner 31 .

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適宜以支持基材之厚度Ts大於黏著劑層之厚度Ta之態樣、即Ts/Ta大於1之態樣實施。Ts/Ta例如可為1.1以上,可為1.2以上,可為1.5以上,亦可為1.7以上,但並無特別限定。例如,藉由增大Ts/Ta,有即便使補強用膜薄型化亦容易發揮良好效果之傾向。於若干態樣中,Ts/Ta可為2以上(例如大於2),可為2.5以上,亦可為2.8以上。又,Ts/Ta例如可為50以下,亦可為20以下。就即便使補強用膜薄型化亦容易發揮較高之加熱後黏著力之觀點而言,Ts/Ta例如可為10以下,可為8以下,亦可為5以下。The reinforcing film disclosed here is preferably implemented in a state in which the thickness Ts of the support substrate is larger than the thickness Ta of the adhesive layer, that is, in a state in which Ts/Ta is larger than 1, for example. Ts/Ta may be, for example, 1.1 or more, 1.2 or more, 1.5 or more, or 1.7 or more, but it is not particularly limited. For example, by increasing Ts/Ta, even if the film for reinforcement is made thinner, there is a tendency that a favorable effect is easily exhibited. In some aspects, Ts/Ta can be greater than 2 (eg greater than 2), greater than or equal to 2.5, or greater than or equal to 2.8. Moreover, Ts/Ta may be 50 or less, for example, and 20 or less may be sufficient as it. Ts/Ta may be, for example, 10 or less, 8 or less, or 5 or less, from the viewpoint of easily exhibiting a high post-heating adhesive force even if the reinforcing film is made thinner.

上述黏著劑層較佳為固著於支持基材。此處所謂固著係指在貼附於被黏著體後黏著力上升之補強用膜中,黏著劑層對支持基材顯示出充分之抓固性,可使得該補強用膜自被黏著體剝離時黏著劑層與支持基材之界面不發生剝離。藉由黏著劑層固著於支持基材之附基材之補強用膜,可使被黏著體與支持基材牢固地一體化。作為黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜之一較佳例,可例舉:於測定上述加熱後黏著力時黏著劑層與支持基材之間不發生剝離(抓固破壞)之補強用膜。測定加熱後黏著力時不發生抓固破壞之補強用膜係屬於黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜的一較佳例。The above-mentioned adhesive layer is preferably fixed to the support substrate. Here, the term "fixing" means that in the reinforcing film whose adhesive force increases after being attached to the adherend, the adhesive layer exhibits sufficient grip on the support substrate, so that the reinforcing film can be peeled off from the adherend. The interface between the adhesive layer and the support substrate does not peel off. The adherend and the support base can be firmly integrated with the base material-attached reinforcing film fixed to the support base by the adhesive layer. As a preferred example of the reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is fixed to the base material, there may be mentioned reinforcement in which no peeling (scratch failure) occurs between the adhesive layer and the supporting base material when the above-mentioned post-heating adhesive force is measured. Use film. The reinforcing film that does not cause grip failure when the adhesive force is measured after heating is a preferred example of the reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is fixed to the substrate.

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可藉由依序包括如下步驟之方法而良好地製造:使液狀之黏著劑組合物與基材之第一面接觸;及於該第一面上使上述黏著劑組合物硬化而形成黏著劑層。上述黏著劑組合物之硬化可伴有該黏著劑組合物之乾燥、交聯、聚合、冷卻等之一種或兩種以上。根據如此使液狀之黏著劑組合物於基材之第一面上硬化而形成黏著劑層之方法,與藉由將硬化後之黏著劑層貼合於基材之第一面而於該第一面上配置黏著劑層之方法相比,可提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。利用該情況,可適宜地製造黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜。The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be favorably produced, for example, by a method including sequentially the steps of: bringing a liquid adhesive composition into contact with the first surface of the substrate; and applying the above-mentioned adhesive on the first surface. The composition hardens to form an adhesive layer. The hardening of the above-mentioned adhesive composition may be accompanied by one or more of drying, cross-linking, polymerization, cooling, etc. of the adhesive composition. According to the method of forming the adhesive layer by hardening the liquid adhesive composition on the first surface of the substrate in this way, and by sticking the hardened adhesive layer on the first surface of the substrate, the adhesive layer is formed on the first surface of the substrate. Compared with the method of disposing the adhesive layer on one side, the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be improved. Taking advantage of this, a reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is fixed to the base material can be suitably produced.

於若干態樣中,作為使液狀之黏著劑組合物與基材之第一面接觸之方法,可採用將上述黏著劑組合物直接塗佈於基材之第一面之方法。藉由使於基材之第一面上硬化之黏著劑層之第一面(黏著面)抵接於剝離面,可獲得該黏著劑層之第二面固著於基材之第一面且該黏著劑層之第一面抵接於剝離面之構成的補強用膜。作為上述剝離面,可利用剝離襯墊之表面或經剝離處理之基材背面等。In some aspects, as a method of bringing the liquid adhesive composition into contact with the first surface of the substrate, a method of directly coating the above-described adhesive composition on the first surface of the substrate can be employed. By making the first side (adhesive side) of the adhesive layer hardened on the first side of the base material abut against the peeling side, the second side of the adhesive agent layer can be fixed on the first side of the base material and The first surface of the adhesive layer is in contact with the peeling surface of the reinforcing film. As the above-mentioned release surface, the surface of a release liner, the back surface of a substrate subjected to release treatment, or the like can be used.

又,例如於使用單體原料之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)的光硬化型黏著劑組合物之情形時,例如亦可於將該黏著劑組合物塗佈於剝離面後,於該塗佈之黏著劑組合物被覆基材之第一面,藉此使基材之第一面與未硬化之上述黏著劑組合物接觸,於該狀態下,對夾於基材之第一面與剝離面之間的黏著劑組合物進行光照射而使其硬化,藉此形成黏著劑層。Also, for example, in the case of a photocurable adhesive composition using a partial polymer (polymer slurry) of a monomer raw material, for example, after the adhesive composition is applied to the release surface, the The first side of the base material is coated with the adhesive composition, so that the first side of the base material is contacted with the uncured adhesive composition, and in this state, the first side and the peeling side sandwiched between the base material The adhesive composition in between is irradiated with light to be hardened, thereby forming an adhesive layer.

再者,上述所例示之方法並非限定此處所揭示之補強用膜之製造方法。於此處所揭示之補強用膜之製造時,可將能夠使黏著劑層固著於基材之第一面之適當方法單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上而使用。此種方法之例可例舉:如上所述使液狀黏著劑組合物於基材之第一面上硬化而形成黏著劑層之方法、或對基材之第一面實施提高黏著劑層之抓固性之表面處理之方法等。例如於可藉由在基材之第一面設置底塗層等方法而使黏著劑層對基材之抓固性充分提高之情形時,亦可藉由將硬化後之黏著劑層貼合於基材之第一面之方法而製造補強用膜。又,藉由選擇基材之材質或選擇黏著劑之組成,亦可提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。又,藉由對在基材之第一面上具有黏著劑層之補強用膜應用高於室溫之溫度,可提高該黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。用於提高抓固性之溫度例如可為35℃~80℃左右,可為40℃~70℃以上程度,亦可為45℃~60℃左右。In addition, the method exemplified above does not limit the manufacturing method of the film for reinforcement disclosed here. At the time of manufacture of the reinforcement film disclosed here, the suitable method which can make an adhesive layer adhere to the 1st surface of a base material can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types. Examples of such a method include: as described above, the liquid adhesive composition is hardened on the first surface of the substrate to form an adhesive layer, or the first surface of the substrate is subjected to an increase in the adhesive layer. The method of surface treatment of grip, etc. For example, in the case where the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be sufficiently improved by methods such as providing a primer layer on the first surface of the substrate, the cured adhesive layer can also be attached to the substrate. The method for the first side of the base material is used to manufacture a reinforcing film. In addition, by selecting the material of the substrate or selecting the composition of the adhesive, the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can also be improved. In addition, by applying a temperature higher than room temperature to the reinforcing film having the adhesive layer on the first side of the substrate, the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be improved. The temperature for improving the grip property may be, for example, about 35°C to 80°C, about 40°C to 70°C or more, or about 45°C to 60°C.

於此處所揭示之補強用膜為具有設置於基材之第一面之第一黏著劑層與設置於該基材之第二面之第二黏著劑層的黏著片材(即,雙面接著性之附基材之黏著片材)之形態之情形時,第一黏著劑層與第二黏著劑層可為相同之構成,亦可為不同之構成。於第一黏著劑層與第二黏著劑層之構成不同之情形時,該不同例如可為組成不同或結構(厚度、表面粗糙度、形成範圍、形成圖案等)不同。例如,第二黏著劑層可為不含聚合物(B)之黏著劑層。又,第二黏著劑層之表面(第二黏著面)於23℃下之表面彈性模數可為1~20 kPa之範圍外(例如超過20 kPa),亦可為30 kPa以上。The reinforcing film disclosed herein is an adhesive sheet having a first adhesive layer disposed on the first side of the substrate and a second adhesive layer disposed on the second side of the substrate (ie, double-sided adhesive In the case of the form of a flexible adhesive sheet with a base material), the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer may have the same structure or may have different structures. When the compositions of the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer are different, the difference may be, for example, a difference in composition or a difference in structure (thickness, surface roughness, formation range, formation pattern, etc.). For example, the second adhesive layer may be an adhesive layer without polymer (B). In addition, the surface elastic modulus of the surface of the second adhesive layer (second adhesive surface) at 23° C. may be outside the range of 1-20 kPa (eg, over 20 kPa), or may be greater than 30 kPa.

<附剝離襯墊之補強用膜> 此處所揭示之補強用膜可採用使黏著劑層之表面(黏著面)抵接於剝離襯墊之剝離面的黏著製品之形態。因此,藉由本說明書,可提供一種包含此處揭示之任一補強用膜、及具有抵接於該補強用膜之黏著面之剝離面之剝離襯墊的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。 <Reinforcement film with release liner> The reinforcing film disclosed here can take the form of an adhesive product in which the surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer is brought into contact with the release surface of the release liner. Therefore, the present specification can provide a reinforcing film with a release liner including any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein, and a release liner having a release surface abutting on the adhesive surface of the reinforcing film.

剝離襯墊之厚度並無特別限定,通常適宜為5 μm~200 μm左右。若剝離襯墊之厚度處於上述範圍內,則對黏著劑層之貼合作業性與自黏著劑層之剝離作業性優異,因此較佳。於若干態樣中,剝離襯墊之厚度例如可為10 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,可為30 μm以上,亦可為40 μm以上。又,就使自黏著劑層之剝離容易化之觀點而言,剝離襯墊之厚度例如可為100 μm以下,亦可為80 μm以下。視需要亦可對剝離襯墊實施塗佈型、混練型、蒸鍍型等公知之抗靜電處理。The thickness of the release liner is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably about 5 μm to 200 μm. If the thickness of the release liner is within the above-mentioned range, the workability of sticking to the adhesive layer and the workability of peeling from the adhesive layer are excellent, which is preferable. In some aspects, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 30 μm or more, or 40 μm or more. Moreover, from the viewpoint of facilitating the peeling from the adhesive layer, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 100 μm or less, or 80 μm or less. If necessary, a known antistatic treatment such as a coating type, a kneading type, and a vapor deposition type may be applied to the release liner.

作為剝離襯墊,並無特別限定,例如可使用於樹脂膜或紙(可為層壓有聚乙烯等樹脂之紙)等襯墊基材之表面具有剝離層之剝離襯墊、或包含利用如氟系聚合物(聚四氟乙烯等)或聚烯烴系樹脂(聚乙烯、聚丙烯等)之低接著性材料所形成之樹脂膜的剝離襯墊等。就表面平滑性優異之方面而言,可良好地採用於作為襯墊基材之樹脂膜之表面具有剝離層之剝離襯墊、或包含利用低接著性材料所形成之樹脂膜之剝離襯墊。作為樹脂膜,只要為可保護黏著劑層之膜,則並無特別限定,例如可例舉:聚乙烯膜、聚丙烯膜、聚丁烯膜、聚丁二烯膜、聚甲基戊烯膜、聚氯乙烯膜、氯乙烯共聚物膜、聚酯膜(PET膜、PBT膜等)、聚胺基甲酸酯膜、乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物膜等。上述剝離層之形成例如可使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑、長鏈烷基系剝離處理劑、烯烴系剝離處理劑、氟系剝離處理劑、脂肪酸醯胺系剝離處理劑、硫化鉬、二氧化矽粉等公知之剝離處理劑。尤佳為使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑。The release liner is not particularly limited. For example, it can be used as a release liner having a release layer on the surface of a liner substrate such as a resin film or paper (which may be paper laminated with a resin such as polyethylene), or a release liner containing a release layer such as Release liners, etc. of resin films formed of low-adhesion materials of fluorine-based polymers (polytetrafluoroethylene, etc.) or polyolefin-based resins (polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.). In terms of excellent surface smoothness, a release liner having a release layer on the surface of a resin film serving as a liner base material, or a release liner including a resin film formed of a low-adhesion material can be favorably used. The resin film is not particularly limited as long as it can protect the adhesive layer, and examples thereof include polyethylene films, polypropylene films, polybutene films, polybutadiene films, and polymethylpentene films. , polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyester film (PET film, PBT film, etc.), polyurethane film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, etc. For the formation of the above-mentioned release layer, for example, polysiloxane-based release treatment agents, long-chain alkyl-based release treatment agents, olefin-based release treatment agents, fluorine-based release treatment agents, fatty acid amide-based release treatment agents, molybdenum sulfide, and carbon dioxide can be used. Silicon powder and other well-known peeling treatment agents. In particular, it is preferable to use a polysiloxane-based release treatment agent.

剝離層之厚度並無特別限制,通常適宜為0.01 μm~1 μm左右,較佳為0.1 μm~1 μm左右。剝離層之形成方法並無特別限定,可適當採用與所使用之剝離處理劑之種類等對應之公知方法。The thickness of the peeling layer is not particularly limited, but is generally preferably about 0.01 μm to 1 μm, preferably about 0.1 μm to 1 μm. The formation method of a peeling layer is not specifically limited, A well-known method corresponding to the kind of peeling treatment agent used, etc. can be used suitably.

<用途> 本說明書所提供之補強用膜例如可在貼合於被黏著體之初期發揮良好之二次加工性,因此可有助於抑制良率降低或包含該補強用膜之製品之高品質化。而且,上述補強用膜在貼附於被黏著體後,可藉由熟化或加熱而使黏著力大幅地上升。例如藉由在貼附於被黏著體後之適當時刻進行加熱,可使補強用膜牢固地接著於被黏著體。利用此種特徵,此處所揭示之補強用膜可於各種領域良好地用以補強各種製品所含之構件。 <Use> For example, the reinforcing film provided in this specification can exhibit good secondary processability in the initial stage of being attached to the adherend, and thus can contribute to suppressing a decrease in yield or improving the quality of a product including the reinforcing film. Moreover, after the said reinforcement film is attached to the to-be-adhered body, the adhesive force can be raised significantly by ageing or heating. For example, by heating at an appropriate timing after being attached to the adherend, the reinforcing film can be firmly adhered to the adherend. Taking advantage of this feature, the reinforcing films disclosed herein can be used favorably in various fields to reinforce members included in various articles.

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可以於具有第一面及第二面之膜狀基材之至少第一面設置有黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態,良好地用作貼附於被黏著體而對該被黏著體進行補強之補強膜。於該補強膜中,作為上述膜基材,可良好地使用包含樹脂膜作為基底膜者。又,就提高補強性能之觀點而言,上述黏著劑層較佳為固著於膜狀基材之第一面。 例如關於用於光學製品之光學構件、或用於電子製品之電子構件,高度之積體化、小型輕量化、薄型化不斷發展,可積層線膨脹係數或厚度不同之複數個較薄之光學構件/電子構件。藉由在此種構件貼附如上所述之補強膜,可對上述光學構件/電子構件賦予適度之剛性。藉此,於製造過程及/或製造後之製品中,可抑制因於上述線膨脹係數或厚度不同之複數個構件間可能產生之應力所導致之捲曲或彎曲。 又,於光學製品/電子製品之製造過程中,於如上所述對較薄之光學構件/電子構件進行切斷加工等形狀加工處理之情形時,藉由對該構件貼附補強膜而進行處理,可緩和伴隨加工之向光學構件/電子構件之局部之應力集中,可減少龜裂、破裂、積層構件之剝離等風險。對光學構件/電子構件貼附補強構件而進行操作亦可有助於緩和該構件進行搬送、積層、旋轉等時之局部應力集中、或抑制該構件之自重所導致之彎折或彎曲等。 進而,包含上述補強膜之光學製品或電子製品等裝置於在市場上供消費者使用之階段,即便於該裝置掉落之情形、置於重量物之下之情形、飛來物碰撞之情形等被施加意外應力之情形時,亦可藉由使該裝置包含補強膜而緩和施加於裝置之應力。因此,藉由使上述裝置包含補強膜,可提高該裝置之耐久性。 For example, the reinforcing film disclosed here can be used in the form of a base-attached adhesive sheet provided with an adhesive layer on at least the first side of a film-like base material having a first side and a second side, and can be suitably used for sticking. A reinforcing film that reinforces the adherend in the adherend. In this reinforcement film, as the said film base material, what contains a resin film as a base film can be used favorably. Moreover, it is preferable that the said adhesive bond layer is fixed to the 1st surface of a film-like base material from a viewpoint of improving the reinforcement performance. For example, optical components used in optical products or electronic components used in electronic products have been increasingly integrated, compact, lightweight, and thin, and multiple thin optical components with different linear expansion coefficients or thicknesses can be laminated. /Electronic components. By attaching the above-mentioned reinforcing film to such a member, moderate rigidity can be imparted to the above-mentioned optical member/electronic member. Thereby, in the manufacturing process and/or the product after manufacture, it is possible to suppress curling or bending caused by the stress that may be generated between the plurality of members having different linear expansion coefficients or thicknesses. In addition, in the manufacturing process of optical products/electronic products, when the thin optical member/electronic member is subjected to shape processing such as cutting processing as described above, the processing is performed by attaching a reinforcing film to the member. , which can alleviate the local stress concentration of optical components/electronic components accompanying processing, and can reduce the risk of cracks, cracks, and peeling of laminated components. The operation of attaching a reinforcing member to an optical member/electronic member can also help to relieve local stress concentration when the member is transported, laminated, rotated, etc., or to suppress bending or bending caused by the member's own weight. Further, devices such as optical products or electronic products including the above-mentioned reinforcing film are in the stage of being used by consumers in the market, even if the device is dropped, placed under a heavy object, or collided with flying objects, etc. In the event of accidental stress, the stress applied to the device can also be alleviated by including a reinforcing film in the device. Therefore, by including the reinforcing film in the above-mentioned device, the durability of the device can be improved.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可以貼附於構成各種攜帶型機器(可攜式機器)之構件之態樣良好地使用。此處所謂「攜帶」,並不單指能夠攜帶,而是指具有個人(標準成人)能夠相對容易地搬運之程度之攜帶性。又,此處所謂攜帶型機器之例可包括:行動電話、智慧型手機、平板型個人電腦、筆記型個人電腦、各種隨身機器、數位相機、數位攝錄影機、音響機器(攜帶音樂播放器、錄音筆等)、計算機(計算器等)、攜帶型遊戲機、電子辭典、電子記事本、電子書籍、車載用資訊機器、攜帶型收音機、攜帶型電視、攜帶型印表機、攜帶型掃描儀、攜帶型調制解調器等攜帶型電子機器,此外,亦可包括機械式手錶或懷錶、手電筒、放大鏡等。構成上述攜帶電子機器之構件之例可包括用於液晶顯示器等薄層顯示器或膜型顯示器等之類之圖像顯示裝置的光學膜或顯示面板等。此處所揭示之補強用膜亦可以貼附於汽車、家電製品等中之各種構件之態樣良好地使用。In addition, the reinforcing film disclosed here can be used favorably in a state of being attached to a member constituting various portable devices (portable devices), for example. The so-called "carrying" here does not just mean being able to carry, but means having a degree of portability that an individual (standard adult) can carry relatively easily. In addition, examples of the so-called portable devices here include: mobile phones, smart phones, tablet PCs, notebook PCs, various portable devices, digital cameras, digital video cameras, audio devices (portable music players) , voice recorder, etc.), computers (calculators, etc.), portable game consoles, electronic dictionaries, electronic notepads, electronic books, in-vehicle information devices, portable radios, portable TVs, portable printers, portable scanners Portable electronic devices such as instruments, portable modems, etc., in addition, may also include mechanical watches or pocket watches, flashlights, magnifying glasses, etc. Examples of the members constituting the above-mentioned portable electronic equipment include optical films, display panels, and the like used for thin-layer displays such as liquid crystal displays, and image display devices such as film-type displays. The reinforcing film disclosed here can be used satisfactorily in the form of being attached to various members in automobiles, household electrical appliances, and the like.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜由於具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力,故可利用其優勢,良好地用於貼附於構成具備能夠彎曲之要素(例如可撓性顯示器等可撓性裝置;亦可稱為可捲曲裝置或可摺疊裝置)之機器之構件的態樣。作為此種機器,例如可例舉上述各種攜帶型機器(可攜式機器)。構成上述攜帶型電子機器之構件之例可包括:用於液晶顯示器或有機EL(電致發光)顯示器等圖像顯示裝置之光學膜或顯示面板等。此處所揭示之補強用膜可於此種攜帶型電子機器中良好地用於構成該機器之構件(典型的是稱為可撓性裝置或可摺疊裝置之圖像顯示裝置等)之補強用途。In addition, since the reinforcing film disclosed here has bending recovery and bending retention force, it can take advantage of its advantages and can be well used for sticking to components capable of bending (for example, flexible devices such as flexible displays; A form of a component of a machine that may also be referred to as a rollable device or a foldable device. As such an apparatus, the above-mentioned various portable apparatuses (portable apparatuses) are mentioned, for example. Examples of members constituting the above-mentioned portable electronic equipment include optical films and display panels used in image display devices such as liquid crystal displays and organic EL (electroluminescence) displays. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be favorably used in such a portable electronic device for reinforcing a member constituting the device (typically, an image display device called a flexible device or a foldable device, etc.).

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適於在作為液晶顯示器面板、電漿顯示器面板(PDP)、有機EL顯示器等之構成要素使用之光學構件之製造時、搬送時等對該光學構件進行補強之用途。作為應用於液晶顯示器面板用偏光板(偏光膜)、波長板、相位差板、光學補償膜、增亮膜、光擴散片材、反射片材等光學構件的補強用膜較為有用。In addition, the reinforcing film disclosed here is suitable for, for example, reinforcement of optical members used as components of liquid crystal display panels, plasma display panels (PDPs), organic EL displays, and the like at the time of manufacture, at the time of transportation, and the like. use. It is useful as a reinforcing film applied to optical members such as polarizing plates (polarizing films) for liquid crystal display panels, wavelength plates, retardation plates, optical compensation films, brightness enhancement films, light diffusing sheets, and reflective sheets.

再者,此處所揭示之補強用膜之用途並無特別限定,可用於以賦予剛性或耐衝擊性等為目的之各種用途。此處所揭示之補強用膜不僅如上所述可良好地用於可撓性裝置用途,還可用於不包括可撓性裝置之其他用途。補強用膜具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力意指該補強用膜之適用範圍之限制較少,實際應用中優勢較大。 [實施例] In addition, the application of the reinforcement film disclosed here is not specifically limited, It can be used for various applications for the purpose of imparting rigidity, impact resistance, and the like. The reinforcing films disclosed herein can be used not only for flexible device applications as described above, but also for other applications that do not include flexible devices. The fact that the reinforcement film has bending recovery and bending retention force means that the application scope of the reinforcement film is less restricted, and the practical application is more advantageous. [Example]

以下,對關於本發明之若干實施例進行說明,但並非意圖將本發明限定於該具體例所示者。再者,以下說明中之「份」及「%」若無特別說明,則為重量基準。Hereinafter, some embodiments of the present invention will be described, but the present invention is not intended to be limited to those shown in the specific examples. In addition, "parts" and "%" in the following description are based on weight unless otherwise specified.

[聚合物(A)之合成] (合成例A1) 於具備攪拌翼、溫度計、氮氣導入管及冷凝器之四口燒瓶中,加入丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)90.2份、丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯(4HBA)8.6份、N-丙烯醯基𠰌啉(ACMO)1.2份、作為聚合起始劑之2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈(AIBN)0.2份、及作為聚合溶劑之乙酸乙酯,一面緩慢攪拌一面導入氮氣,將燒瓶內之液溫保持為65℃左右進行6小時聚合反應,製備聚合物濃度為35%之丙烯酸系聚合物A1溶液。丙烯酸系聚合物A1之重量平均分子量(Mw)為54萬。 [Synthesis of polymer (A)] (Synthesis example A1) In a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a thermometer, a nitrogen introduction tube and a condenser, 90.2 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 8.6 parts of 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), and N-acryloyl acrylate were added. 1.2 parts of oxoline (ACMO), 0.2 part of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) as a polymerization initiator, and ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent, while stirring slowly, introduce nitrogen gas into the flask. The liquid temperature was maintained at about 65° C. to carry out the polymerization reaction for 6 hours to prepare a solution of acrylic polymer A1 with a polymer concentration of 35%. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic polymer A1 was 540,000.

(合成例A2) 除了將單體組成變更為2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/丙烯酸丁酯(BA)=86.1份/9.7份/1.8份/2.4份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A2之溶液。 (Synthesis example A2) Solution polymerization was carried out in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1, except that the monomer composition was changed to 2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/butyl acrylate (BA) = 86.1 parts/9.7 parts/1.8 parts/2.4 parts to obtain an acrylic acid-based Solution of polymer A2.

(合成例A3) 除了將單體組成變更為BA/4HBA=96份/4份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A3之溶液。 (Synthesis example A3) A solution of the acrylic polymer A3 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except that the monomer composition was changed to BA/4HBA=96 parts/4 parts.

(合成例A4) 除了將單體組成變更為2EHA/丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(HEA)/甲基丙烯酸甲酯(MMA)/N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮(NVP)=65份/15份/7份/13份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A4之溶液。 (Synthesis example A4) Except changing the monomer composition to 2EHA/2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA)/methyl methacrylate (MMA)/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) = 65 parts/15 parts/7 parts A solution of acrylic polymer A4 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except for /13 parts.

[聚合物(B)之合成] 將乙酸乙酯101.15份、MMA 40份、甲基丙烯酸正丁酯(BMA)20份、甲基丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHMA)20份、官能基當量為900 g/mol之含聚有機矽氧烷骨架之甲基丙烯酸酯單體(商品名:X-22-174ASX,信越化學工業公司製造)8.7份、官能基當量為4600 g/mol之含聚有機矽氧烷骨架之甲基丙烯酸酯單體(商品名:KF-2012,信越化學工業公司製造)11.3份、及作為鏈轉移劑之硫甘油0.8份投入至具備攪拌翼、溫度計、氮氣導入管、冷凝器及滴液漏斗之四口燒瓶中。然後,於70℃下,在氮氣氛圍下攪拌30分鐘後,投入作為熱聚合起始劑之AIBN 0.2份,於70℃下進行3小時反應。繼而,於80℃下攪拌30分鐘後,進而投入AIBN 0.1份,於80℃下進行2小時反應。其後,進而投入AIBN 0.05份,於80℃下進行2小時反應,獲得聚合物B。所獲得之聚合物B之Mw為20000。 [Synthesis of polymer (B)] 101.15 parts of ethyl acetate, 40 parts of MMA, 20 parts of n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), 20 parts of 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA), and the functional group equivalent of 900 g/mol of polyorganic organic 8.7 parts of methacrylate monomer with siloxane skeleton (trade name: X-22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), methacrylic acid containing polyorganosiloxane skeleton with functional group equivalent of 4600 g/mol 11.3 parts of ester monomer (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and 0.8 part of thioglycerol as a chain transfer agent were put into the fourth part equipped with stirring blade, thermometer, nitrogen introduction tube, condenser and dropping funnel in the flask. Then, after stirring at 70 degreeC for 30 minutes under nitrogen atmosphere, 0.2 part of AIBN as a thermal polymerization initiator was injected|thrown-in, and reaction was performed at 70 degreeC for 3 hours. Then, after stirring at 80 degreeC for 30 minutes, 0.1 part of AIBN was further injected|thrown-in, and it was made to react at 80 degreeC for 2 hours. Then, 0.05 part of AIBN was further injected|thrown-in, the reaction was performed at 80 degreeC for 2 hours, and the polymer B was obtained. The Mw of the obtained polymer B was 20,000.

再者,上述各聚合物之Mw係使用GPC裝置(Tosoh公司製造,HLC-8220GPC)於下述條件下進行測定,藉由聚苯乙烯換算而求出。 [GPC條件] ・樣品濃度:0.2 wt%(四氫呋喃(THF)溶液) ・樣品注入量:10 μl ・溶析液:THF、流速:0.6 ml/min ・測定溫度:40℃ ・管柱: 樣品管柱:TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H(1根)+TSKgel SuperHZM-H(2根) 參考管柱:TSKgel SuperH-RC(1根) ・檢測器:示差折射計(RI) In addition, the Mw of each said polymer was measured under the following conditions using a GPC apparatus (Tosoh company make, HLC-8220GPC), and was calculated|required by polystyrene conversion. [GPC conditions] ・Sample concentration: 0.2 wt% (tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution) ・Sample injection volume: 10 μl ・Eluent: THF, flow rate: 0.6 ml/min ・Measurement temperature: 40℃ ・Pipe string: Sample column: TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H (1) + TSKgel SuperHZM-H (2) Reference column: TSKgel SuperH-RC (1 piece) ・Detector: Differential Refractometer (RI)

[補強用膜之製作] <實施例1> 添加100份丙烯酸系聚合物A1、2.0份聚合物B、以固形物成分換算計0.015份作為交聯劑之異氰酸酯化合物C1(商品名「Coronate HX」,Tosoh公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。 準備單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊(商品名「DIAFOIL MRF75」,三菱化學公司製造),於其聚矽氧處理面塗佈上述所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液,於130℃、1分鐘之條件下進行乾燥,藉此形成厚度25 μm之黏著劑層。 繼而,於所獲得之黏著劑層之表面貼合厚度50 μm之聚醯亞胺基材(商品名「Upilex 50S」,宇部興產公司製造)而獲得本例之補強用膜。該補強用膜具有附剝離襯墊之黏著片材之形態,即,於基材單面具有黏著劑層,於其黏著面抵接有剝離襯墊之剝離面。 再者,針對本例之補強用膜,根據黏著劑層中之OH量(丙烯酸系聚合物A1中之羥基之莫耳數)與NCO量(異氰酸酯化合物之異氰酸基之莫耳數),算出莫耳比([NCO]/[OH]),結果為0.001。 [Production of Reinforcing Membrane] <Example 1> 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, 2.0 parts of polymer B, and 0.015 part of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a crosslinking agent in terms of solid content were added, and diluted with ethyl acetate to The solid content of the whole was 30%, and the acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained. A release liner (trade name "DIAFOIL MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) containing a polyester resin with a thickness of 75 μm which was subjected to polysiloxane treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic acid obtained above was coated on the polysiloxane treated surface. The adhesive solution was dried at 130° C. for 1 minute to form an adhesive layer with a thickness of 25 μm. Then, a polyimide substrate (trade name "Upilex 50S", manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) with a thickness of 50 μm was pasted on the surface of the obtained adhesive layer to obtain the reinforcing film of this example. The reinforcing film has the form of an adhesive sheet with a release liner, that is, it has an adhesive layer on one surface of the base material, and the release surface of the release liner is in contact with the adhesive surface. Furthermore, for the reinforcing film of this example, according to the amount of OH in the adhesive layer (the number of moles of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of NCO (the number of moles of the isocyanate groups of the isocyanate compound), The molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) was calculated and found to be 0.001.

<實施例2~5> 將異氰酸酯化合物C1之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份,以固形物成分換算計為0.05份(實施例2)、0.10份(實施例3)、0.20份(實施例4)、0.60份(實施例5),除此以外,以與實施例1相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 2 to 5> As shown in Table 1, the usage-amount of the isocyanate compound C1 was changed to 0.05 part (Example 2), 0.10 part (Example 3), 0.20 part ( Example 4), except for 0.60 part (Example 5), it carried out similarly to Example 1, and obtained the acrylic adhesive solution of each example. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<實施例6~9> 將聚合物B之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份為0.4份(實施例6)、1.0份(實施例7)、3.0份(實施例8)、6.0份(實施例9),除此以外,以與實施例3相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 6 to 9> As shown in Table 1, the amount of polymer B used was changed to 0.4 parts (Example 6), 1.0 parts (Example 7), 3.0 parts (Example 8), 6.0 parts with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1 (Example 9) Except for this, it carried out similarly to Example 3, and obtained the acrylic adhesive solution of each example. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<實施例10> 除使用丙烯酸系聚合物A2代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1以外,以與實施例3相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Example 10> The acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the acrylic polymer A2 was used instead of the acrylic polymer A1. The reinforcing film of this example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution was used.

<實施例11> 使用丙烯酸系聚合物A3代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1,使用異氰酸酯化合物C2(商品名「Takenate D110N」,三井化學公司製造)作為交聯劑,該異氰酸酯化合物C2相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A3 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.07份,除此以外,以與實施例1相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Example 11> Instead of the acrylic polymer A1, an acrylic polymer A3 was used, and an isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Corporation) was used as a crosslinking agent, and the isocyanate compound C2 was solid in 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A3. The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution of this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1, except that it was 0.07 part in terms of physical components. The reinforcing film of this example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution was used.

<實施例12~13> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A3 100份,以固形物成分換算計為0.09份(實施例12)、0.395份(實施例13),除此以外,以與實施例11相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 12 to 13> Except having changed the usage-amount of isocyanate compound C2 to 0.09 part (Example 12) and 0.395 part (Example 13) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3 as shown in Table 1 , the acrylic adhesive solution of each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 11. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<實施例14~18> 於實施例3之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液之製備中,除丙烯酸系聚合物A1、聚合物B、異氰酸酯化合物C1以外,如表1所示,進而添加相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.001份(實施例14)、0.005份(實施例15)、0.010份(實施例16)、0.020份(實施例17)、0.050份(實施例18)之鐵系觸媒(三乙醯丙酮鐵,日本化學產業公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯(溶劑成分之98%)、乙醯丙酮(溶劑成分之2%)稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。再者,表1中亦示出黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])。上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])係根據黏著劑層中之OH量(丙烯酸系聚合物A1中之羥基之莫耳數)與觸媒量(觸媒之莫耳數)而算出之值。 <Examples 14 to 18> In the preparation of the acrylic adhesive solution of Example 3, in addition to the acrylic polymer A1, the polymer B, and the isocyanate compound C1, as shown in Table 1, 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A1 was added as a solid In terms of components, the iron-based catalysts (three Ferric acetone acetone, manufactured by Nippon Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was diluted with ethyl acetate (98% of solvent content) and acetone acetone (2% of solvent content) until the solid content of the whole was 30%, and acrylic acid of each example was obtained Adhesive solution. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively. In addition, Table 1 also shows the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst and hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer. The above molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) is determined according to the amount of OH in the adhesive layer (the number of moles of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of catalyst (the number of moles of the catalyst). Calculated value.

<實施例19~20> 將聚合物B之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份為1.0份(實施例19)、3.0份(實施例20),除此以外,以與實施例14相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 19 to 20> Except having changed the usage-amount of polymer B to 1.0 part (Example 19) and 3.0 part (Example 20) with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1 as shown in Table 1, it was the same as Example 14. In this way, the acrylic adhesive solution of each example was obtained. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<比較例1> 添加100份丙烯酸系聚合物A1、以固形物成分換算計為0.05份之作為交聯劑之異氰酸酯化合物C1(商品名「Coronate HX」,Tosoh公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 1> 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1 and 0.05 part of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a crosslinking agent in terms of solid content were added, and diluted with ethyl acetate to obtain a solid content of the whole The composition was 30%, and the acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained. The reinforcing film of this example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution was used.

<比較例2~3> 將異氰酸酯化合物C1之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.10份(比較例2)、0.20份(比較例3),除此以外,以與比較例1相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 2 to 3> Except having changed the usage-amount of isocyanate compound C1 to 0.10 part (Comparative Example 2) and 0.20 part (Comparative Example 3) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1 as shown in Table 1, In the same manner as in Comparative Example 1, the acrylic adhesive solution of each example was obtained. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<比較例4> 使用丙烯酸系聚合物A4代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1,使用異氰酸酯化合物C2(商品名「Takenate D110N」,三井化學公司製造)作為交聯劑,該異氰酸酯化合物C2相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.50份,除此以外,以與比較例1相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 4> Instead of the acrylic polymer A1, the acrylic polymer A4 was used, and an isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Corporation) was used as a crosslinking agent, and the isocyanate compound C2 was solid with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A4 The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution of this example was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 1, except that the content was converted to 0.50 part. The reinforcing film of this example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution was used.

<比較例5~6> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為1.10份(比較例5)、2.50份(比較例6),除此以外,以與比較例4相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 5 to 6> Except having changed the usage-amount of isocyanate compound C2 to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 5) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 6) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4 as shown in Table 1, In the same manner as in Comparative Example 4, the acrylic adhesive solution of each example was obtained. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<比較例7> 於丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液之製備中,除丙烯酸系聚合物A4、異氰酸酯化合物C2以外,如表1所示,添加相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份為2.0份之聚合物B,除此以外,以與比較例4相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 7> In the preparation of the acrylic adhesive solution, in addition to the acrylic polymer A4 and the isocyanate compound C2, as shown in Table 1, 2.0 parts of the polymer B was added relative to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A4. In the same manner as in Comparative Example 4, the acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained. The reinforcing film of this example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution was used.

<比較例8~9> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為1.10份(比較例8)、2.50份(比較例9),除此以外,以與比較例7相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 8 to 9> Except having changed the usage-amount of isocyanate compound C2 to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 8) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 9) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4 as shown in Table 1, In the same manner as in Comparative Example 7, the acrylic adhesive solution of each example was obtained. A reinforcing film of each example was produced in the same manner as the production of the reinforcing film of Example 1 except that these acrylic adhesive solutions were used, respectively.

<評價> [表面彈性模數] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化,實施表面彈性模數測定。將保護黏著面之剝離襯墊剝離,使用奈米壓痕儀裝置(Hysitron Inc.製造之Triboindenter),對黏著劑層表面壓入壓頭至壓入深度6 μm,藉由利用上述奈米壓痕儀進行測定而獲得最大荷重(Pmax)[GPa/mm 2]。將其代入如下式中, 表面硬度[GPa]=Pmax/A 算出表面硬度,換算成[kPa]單位,記錄為23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)。測定條件如下所述。再者,上式中,A為壓頭之接觸投影面積[mm 2]。 (測定條件) 壓頭接近速度:5 μm/s 最大位移:6 μm 壓入速度:5 μm/s 抽出速度:5 μm/s 使用壓頭:Conical(球形壓頭:曲率半徑10 μm) 測定方法:單一壓入測定 測定溫度:室溫(23℃) <Evaluation> [Surface Elastic Modulus] The reinforcing film of each example was aged at 50° C. for 1 day, and the surface elastic modulus was measured. The release liner protecting the adhesive surface was peeled off, and a nano-indenter device (Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron Inc.) was used to press an indenter on the surface of the adhesive layer to a depth of 6 μm. The maximum load (Pmax) [GPa/mm 2 ] was obtained by measuring with the instrument. Substitute it into the following formula, Surface hardness [GPa]=Pmax/A Calculate the surface hardness, convert it into [kPa] unit, and record it as the surface elastic modulus at 23°C (23°C surface elastic modulus). The measurement conditions are as follows. Furthermore, in the above formula, A is the contact projected area of the indenter [mm 2 ]. (Measurement conditions) Approaching speed of indenter: 5 μm/s Maximum displacement: 6 μm Pressing speed: 5 μm/s Extraction speed: 5 μm/s Indenter used: Conical (spherical indenter: radius of curvature 10 μm) Measurement method : Single push-in measurement Measurement temperature: Room temperature (23°C)

[體積彈性模數G'及tanδ] 準備單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊R1(商品名「DIAFOIL MRF75」,三菱化學公司製造),於其聚矽氧處理面塗佈各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液,於130℃、1分鐘之條件下進行乾燥,藉此形成厚度25 μm之黏著劑層。繼而,將單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊R2(商品名「DIAFOIL MRE75」,三菱化學公司製造)以其聚矽氧處理面為黏著劑層側之方式被覆於所獲得之黏著劑層之表面,於50℃下進行1天熟化。 僅取出所獲得之黏著劑層,積層至約1 mm厚度,將其沖切成

Figure 02_image005
8 mm,製作圓柱狀顆粒,作為測定用樣品。 將上述測定樣品固定於
Figure 02_image005
8 mm平行板之治具,利用動態黏彈性測定裝置(TA Instruments公司製造之「ARES」),於以下條件下測定儲存彈性模數G'、損耗彈性模數G''及損耗正切tanδ,求出23℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 23[kPa]、80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80[kPa]及80℃下之tanδ(80℃下之損耗彈性模數G'' 80/80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80)。 ・測定模式:剪切模式 ・溫度範圍 :-70℃~200℃ ・升溫速度 :5℃/min ・頻率:1 Hz 再者,儲存彈性模數G'相當於材料變形時作為彈性能量儲存之部分,係表示硬度之程度之指標。損耗彈性模數G''相當於材料變形時因內部摩擦等而散逸之損失能量部分,表示黏性程度。 [Bulk modulus of elasticity G' and tanδ] A release liner R1 (trade name "DIAFOIL MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) with a thickness of 75 μm polysiloxane-treated on one side was prepared and made of polyester resin. The silicone-treated surface was coated with the acrylic adhesive solution of each example, and dried at 130° C. for 1 minute to form an adhesive layer with a thickness of 25 μm. Next, a release liner R2 (trade name "DIAFOIL MRE75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) containing a polyester resin with a thickness of 75 μm and having been subjected to polysiloxane treatment on one side was used as the adhesive layer side with the polysiloxane treated surface. It was coated on the surface of the obtained adhesive layer, and was aged at 50° C. for 1 day. Only the obtained adhesive layer is taken out, laminated to a thickness of about 1 mm, and punched out
Figure 02_image005
8 mm, cylindrical pellets were prepared and used as samples for measurement. The above-mentioned measurement samples were fixed in
Figure 02_image005
For a jig of an 8 mm parallel plate, use a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device (“ARES” manufactured by TA Instruments) to measure the storage elastic modulus G', the loss elastic modulus G'' and the loss tangent tanδ under the following conditions, and find The storage elastic modulus G' 23 [kPa] at 23 °C, the storage elastic modulus G' 80 [kPa] at 80 °C and the tanδ at 80 °C (loss elastic modulus G'' 80 / Storage elastic modulus at 80°C G' 80 ).・Measurement mode: Shear mode ・Temperature range: -70℃~200℃ ・Heating rate: 5℃/min ・Frequency: 1 Hz Furthermore, the storage elastic modulus G' corresponds to the part of elastic energy stored when the material is deformed , which is an indicator of the degree of hardness. The loss elastic modulus G'' is equivalent to the part of the lost energy dissipated due to internal friction, etc. when the material is deformed, and represents the degree of viscosity.

[初期黏著力] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化,連同剝離襯墊切割成寬度25 mm×長度140 mm,作為測定樣品。將剝離襯墊自上述測定樣品剝離,使黏著面露出,使2 kg手壓輥往返1次而將其壓接至作為被黏著體之不鏽鋼鋼板(SUS304BA板)。將如此壓接至被黏著體之測定樣品於23℃環境溫度下放置30分鐘後,使用拉伸試驗機(島津製作所公司製造,商品名「Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm/min高速模式(AG-50NX plus)」),於剝離角度180度、剝離速度(拉伸速度)300 mm/min之條件下,測定自上述被黏著體剝離補強用膜時之荷重,將測定時之平均荷重記錄為初期黏著力[gf/25 mm]。 [Initial Adhesion] The reinforcing film of each example was aged at 50° C. for one day, and was cut into a measurement sample of 25 mm in width×140 mm in length together with a release liner. The release liner was peeled off from the said measurement sample, the adhesive surface was exposed, and the 2 kg hand roll was reciprocated once, and it was press-bonded to the stainless steel plate (SUS304BA plate) which is the to-be-adhered body. The measurement sample thus crimped to the adherend was left to stand at an ambient temperature of 23°C for 30 minutes, and then a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm/min high-speed mode (AG- 50NX plus)"), under the conditions of peeling angle of 180 degrees and peeling speed (stretching speed) of 300 mm/min, measure the load when peeling the reinforcing film from the above adherend, and record the average load at the time of measurement as the initial stage Adhesion [gf/25 mm].

[加熱後黏著力] 針對各例之補強用膜,以與上述初期黏著力測定相同之方式準備測定樣品,壓接至被黏著體。然後,將壓接至上述被黏著體之測定樣品於60℃環境溫度下加熱60分鐘。其後,於23℃環境溫度下放置30分鐘,使用拉伸試驗機(島津製作所公司製造,商品名「Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速模式(AG-50NX plus)」),於剝離角度180度、剝離速度(拉伸速度)300 mm/min之條件下,測定自上述被黏著體剝離補強用膜時之荷重,將測定時之平均荷重記錄為加熱後黏著力[gf/25 mm]。 [Adhesion after heating] For the reinforcing film of each example, a measurement sample was prepared in the same manner as in the above-mentioned initial adhesive force measurement, and it was crimped to the adherend. Then, the measurement sample crimped to the adherend was heated at an ambient temperature of 60° C. for 60 minutes. After that, it was left to stand at an ambient temperature of 23°C for 30 minutes, using a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min high-speed mode (AG-50NX plus)"), at a peeling angle of 180 Under the conditions of 300 mm/min of peeling speed and peeling speed (tensile speed), the load when peeling off the reinforcing film from the adherend was measured, and the average load during the measurement was recorded as the adhesive force after heating [gf/25 mm].

[彎曲保持試驗] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化後,將剝離襯墊剝離,於露出之黏著面貼合厚度25 μm之聚醯亞胺基材(商品名「Upilex 25S」,宇部興產公司製造),於60℃下加熱60分鐘使其密接。繼而,將所獲得之測定樣品(積層體)以25 μm基材側為內側而彎折成

Figure 02_image005
6 mm,於此狀態下固定,於80℃下進行15小時加熱。然後,放置於室溫(23℃),確認充分冷卻後,解除上述測定樣品之彎折狀態之固定,自固定解除起10分鐘以內,使用分度器,測定彎折之上述測定樣品之彎曲角度[°],評價彎曲回復性。再者,彎曲角度係測定樣品之打開角度(測定樣品自彎折狀態打開之側之角度),越接近於180°,則具有越優異之彎曲回復性,彎曲角度越接近於0°,則彎曲回復性越差。 繼而,作為彎曲保持力之評價,目視確認測定樣品之彎曲部有無「剝離」,將未確認到「剝離」之情形評價為「G(Good)」,將確認到「剝離」之情形評價為「P(Poor)」。 [Bending retention test] The reinforcing films of each example were aged at 50° C. for 1 day, then the release liner was peeled off, and a polyimide substrate with a thickness of 25 μm (trade name “” Upilex 25S", manufactured by Ube Kosan Co., Ltd.), was heated at 60°C for 60 minutes to make it adhere. Next, the obtained measurement sample (layered body) was folded with the 25 μm substrate side as the inner side.
Figure 02_image005
6 mm, fixed in this state, and heated at 80°C for 15 hours. Then, it was placed at room temperature (23°C), and after confirming that it was sufficiently cooled, the fixing of the bending state of the above-mentioned measurement sample was released, and within 10 minutes after the fixing was released, the bending angle [° ] to evaluate the bending recovery. Furthermore, the bending angle is the opening angle of the measurement sample (the angle at which the sample is opened from the bending state), the closer to 180°, the better the bending recovery, and the closer the bending angle is to 0°, the more bending The less responsive. Next, as the evaluation of the bending retention force, the presence or absence of "peeling" in the curved portion of the measurement sample was visually confirmed, the case where "peeling" was not confirmed was evaluated as "G (Good)", and the case where "peeling" was confirmed was evaluated as "P". (Poor)".

[氣泡產生確認] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化後,切割成10 cm×10 cm尺寸,將剝離襯墊剝離,目視確認每10 cm見方之氣泡產生量,根據以下基準進行評價。 E(Excellent):未確認到氣泡產生。 G(Good):確認到氣泡產生,但氣泡產生面積為每10 cm見方為50%以下。 A(Acceptable):以每10 cm見方為50%以上之面積確認到氣泡產生。但為實際應用中無問題之等級。 [Confirmation of bubble generation] The reinforcing film of each example was aged at 50°C for 1 day, then cut into a size of 10 cm×10 cm, the release liner was peeled off, the amount of air bubbles generated per 10 cm square was visually confirmed, and the evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. E (Excellent): No bubble generation was confirmed. G (Good): The generation of air bubbles was confirmed, but the area of air bubble generation was 50% or less per 10 cm square. A (Acceptable): The generation of air bubbles was confirmed in an area of 50% or more per 10 cm square. However, it is a level that has no problem in practical application.

將對各例之補強用膜之評價結果示於表1。表1中亦一起示出各例之黏著劑層之組成之概略。Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the reinforcing films of the respective examples. Table 1 also shows the outline of the composition of the adhesive layer of each example.

[表1] 表1    聚合物(A)[份] 聚合物(B) [份] 交聯劑[份] 莫耳比 [NCO]/[OH] 觸媒 [份] 觸媒莫耳比 [觸媒]/[OH] 表面彈性模數 23℃[kPa] 體積彈性模數 23℃[kPa] 體積彈性模數 80℃[kPa] tanδ 80℃ 初期黏著力 [gf/25 mm] 加熱後黏著力 [gf/25 mm] 彎曲回復性 [°] 彎曲保持力 氣泡產生 A1 A2 A3 A4 C1 C2 實施例1 100 - - - 2.0 0.015 - 0.001 - - 1.2 33 8 0.79 325 2144 35 G G 實施例2 100 - - - 2.0 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.7 33 11 0.60 368 877 50 G G 實施例3 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.1 33 11 0.51 256 821 90 G G 實施例4 100 - - - 2.0 0.20 - 0.016 - - 6.9 33 14 0.41 209 607 90 G G 實施例5 100 - - - 2.0 0.60 - 0.049 - - 10.8 41 24 0.23 128 463 100 G A 實施例6 100 - - - 0.4 0.10 - 0.008 - - 3.2 32 11 0.52 502 923 120 G G 實施例7 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 4.8 32 12 0.52 221 750 115 G G 實施例8 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.6 38 13 0.51 283 651 65 G G 實施例9 100 - - - 6.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 6.8 39 14 0.51 185 495 60 G G 實施例10 - 100 - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.3 34 12 0.51 262 832 90 G G 實施例11 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.07 0.028 - - 15.1 81 52 0.25 275 547 105 G G 實施例12 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.09 0.036 - - 15.5 96 63 0.24 245 404 105 G A 實施例13 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.395 0.160 - - 17.8 114 88 0.13 186 331 110 G A 實施例14 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.001 4.6E-05 5.1 33 12 0.51 105 602 90 G E 實施例15 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.005 2.3E-04 5.1 33 12 0.52 159 624 85 G E 實施例16 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.0 33 11 0.51 160 641 90 G E 實施例17 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.020 9.2E-04 5.1 34 13 0.51 134 644 90 G E 實施例18 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.050 2.3E-03 4.9 33 11 0.52 115 483 85 G E 實施例19 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 4.7 33 11 0.51 199 719 110 G E 實施例20 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.4 37 12 0.52 143 729 60 G E 比較例1 100 - - - - 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.3 29 10 0.61 2585 - 35 G G 比較例2 100 - - - - 0.10 - 0.008 - - 2.6 31 11 0.54 1306 - 65 G G 比較例3 100 - - - - 0.20 - 0.016 - - 3.0 34 15 0.33 873 - 110 G G 比較例4 - - - 100 - - 0.50 0.013 - - 22.6 248 60 0.30 1210 - 90 P G 比較例5 - - - 100 - - 1.10 0.028 - - 24.1 246 75 0.22 940 - 105 P G 比較例6 - - - 100 - - 2.50 0.063 - - 34.2 313 111 0.11 923 - 120 P A 比較例7 - - - 100 2.0 - 0.50 0.013 - - 26.2 250 61 0.31 330 735 80 P G 比較例8 - - - 100 2.0 - 1.10 0.028 - - 28.1 251 73 0.24 92 1227 105 P G 比較例9 - - - 100 2.0 - 2.50 0.063 - - 36.0 316 115 0.13 57 796 110 P A [Table 1] Table 1 Polymer (A) [parts] Polymer (B) [parts] Cross-linking agent [parts] Molar ratio [NCO]/[OH] catalyst [parts] Catalyst molar ratio [catalyst]/[OH] Surface modulus of elasticity 23℃[kPa] Bulk modulus of elasticity 23°C [kPa] Bulk modulus of elasticity 80°C [kPa] tanδ 80℃ Initial adhesion [gf/25 mm] Adhesion after heating [gf/25 mm] Bending resilience [°] Bend retention bubble generation A1 A2 A3 A4 C1 C2 Example 1 100 - - - 2.0 0.015 - 0.001 - - 1.2 33 8 0.79 325 2144 35 G G Example 2 100 - - - 2.0 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.7 33 11 0.60 368 877 50 G G Example 3 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.1 33 11 0.51 256 821 90 G G Example 4 100 - - - 2.0 0.20 - 0.016 - - 6.9 33 14 0.41 209 607 90 G G Example 5 100 - - - 2.0 0.60 - 0.049 - - 10.8 41 twenty four 0.23 128 463 100 G A Example 6 100 - - - 0.4 0.10 - 0.008 - - 3.2 32 11 0.52 502 923 120 G G Example 7 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 4.8 32 12 0.52 221 750 115 G G Example 8 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.6 38 13 0.51 283 651 65 G G Example 9 100 - - - 6.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 6.8 39 14 0.51 185 495 60 G G Example 10 - 100 - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.3 34 12 0.51 262 832 90 G G Example 11 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.07 0.028 - - 15.1 81 52 0.25 275 547 105 G G Example 12 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.09 0.036 - - 15.5 96 63 0.24 245 404 105 G A Example 13 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.395 0.160 - - 17.8 114 88 0.13 186 331 110 G A Example 14 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.001 4.6E-05 5.1 33 12 0.51 105 602 90 G E Example 15 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.005 2.3E-04 5.1 33 12 0.52 159 624 85 G E Example 16 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.0 33 11 0.51 160 641 90 G E Example 17 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.020 9.2E-04 5.1 34 13 0.51 134 644 90 G E Example 18 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.050 2.3E-03 4.9 33 11 0.52 115 483 85 G E Example 19 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 4.7 33 11 0.51 199 719 110 G E Example 20 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.4 37 12 0.52 143 729 60 G E Comparative Example 1 100 - - - - 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.3 29 10 0.61 2585 - 35 G G Comparative Example 2 100 - - - - 0.10 - 0.008 - - 2.6 31 11 0.54 1306 - 65 G G Comparative Example 3 100 - - - - 0.20 - 0.016 - - 3.0 34 15 0.33 873 - 110 G G Comparative Example 4 - - - 100 - - 0.50 0.013 - - 22.6 248 60 0.30 1210 - 90 P G Comparative Example 5 - - - 100 - - 1.10 0.028 - - 24.1 246 75 0.22 940 - 105 P G Comparative Example 6 - - - 100 - - 2.50 0.063 - - 34.2 313 111 0.11 923 - 120 P A Comparative Example 7 - - - 100 2.0 - 0.50 0.013 - - 26.2 250 61 0.31 330 735 80 P G Comparative Example 8 - - - 100 2.0 - 1.10 0.028 - - 28.1 251 73 0.24 92 1227 105 P G Comparative Example 9 - - - 100 2.0 - 2.50 0.063 - - 36.0 316 115 0.13 57 796 110 P A

如表1所示,實施例1~20之黏著劑包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B),與不包含上述聚合物(B)之比較例1~6相比,初期黏著力被抑制得較低。又,實施例1~20之黏著劑之加熱後黏著力大幅地上升。進而,實施例1~20之補強用膜之黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa之範圍內,彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力亦良好。另一方面,上述23℃表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa之範圍外之比較例4~9中,於彎曲保持試驗中確認到剝離。As shown in Table 1, the adhesives of Examples 1 to 20 contained the polymer (A) and the polymer (B), and the initial adhesive force was suppressed as compared with Comparative Examples 1 to 6 that did not contain the above-mentioned polymer (B). lower. In addition, the adhesive force of the adhesives of Examples 1-20 increased significantly after heating. Furthermore, the 23°C surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layers of the reinforcing films of Examples 1 to 20 was in the range of 1 to 20 kPa, and the flexural recovery and flexural retention were also good. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 4 to 9 in which the surface elastic modulus at 23° C. was outside the range of 1 to 20 kPa, peeling was confirmed in the bending retention test.

更具體而言,根據實施例1~5之對比,確認到如下傾向:黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數於1~20 kPa之範圍內越高,彎曲回復性越得到改善,初期黏著力及加熱後黏著力越低。實施例2~5之彎曲回復性優於實施例1,23℃表面彈性模數為2 kPa以上,80℃下之tanδ 80為0.10~0.60之範圍內。又,實施例5中,表面彈性模數、體積彈性模數均為較高值,加熱後黏著力上升與實施例1~4相比,為相對較低之結果,又,與上述其他實施例相比,有黏著劑層表面之氣泡產生量變多之傾向。實施例2~4中,初期黏著力、加熱後黏著力、彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力更均衡地得到改善,黏著劑層中之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03之範圍內。又,實施例1~4中,發現黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23無差異。又,關於實施例2~3,發現80℃體積彈性模數G' 80無差異。關於實施例1~5,相較於體積彈性模數,23℃表面彈性模數與彎曲回復性之相關關係更高。 More specifically, according to the comparison of Examples 1 to 5, the following tendencies were confirmed: the higher the surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer at 23°C in the range of 1 to 20 kPa, the more improved the bending recovery and the initial adhesive force. And the lower the adhesion after heating. The bending recovery properties of Examples 2 to 5 are better than those of Example 1, the surface elastic modulus at 23°C is more than 2 kPa, and the tanδ 80 at 80°C is in the range of 0.10 to 0.60. In addition, in Example 5, both the surface elastic modulus and the bulk elastic modulus were relatively high, and the increase in the adhesive force after heating was relatively low compared with Examples 1 to 4. Furthermore, compared with the above-mentioned other Examples In contrast, the amount of air bubbles generated on the surface of the adhesive layer tends to increase. In Examples 2 to 4, the initial adhesion, post-heating adhesion, bending recovery and bending retention were improved more evenly, and the molar ratio of isocyanate groups and hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer ([NCO]/[ OH]) in the range of 0.002 to 0.03. In addition, in Examples 1-4, the 23 degreeC bulk elasticity modulus G' 23 of an adhesive bond layer was found to have no difference. Moreover, about Examples 2-3, the 80 degreeC bulk elasticity modulus G'80 was found to have no difference. Regarding Examples 1 to 5, the correlation between the surface elastic modulus at 23° C. and the bending recovery is higher than that of the bulk elastic modulus.

又,根據實施例6~9之對比,確認到聚合物(B)之使用量越增加,黏著力越降低之傾向。聚合物(B)之使用量相對於聚合物(A)100份為0.5~5份之範圍內的實施例7~8中,初期黏著力未達500 gf/25 mm,且加熱後黏著力為500 gf/25 mm以上,更好地兼顧了貼附初期之輕剝離性與加熱後黏著力上升。又,有聚合物(B)之使用量越多,則23℃表面彈性模數越高,彎曲回復性越低之傾向。又,根據實施例10~13之結果,確認到:即便變更黏著劑之聚合物(A)之種類或交聯劑種,亦可達成所期望之效果。與實施例12~13相比,實施例10~11之加熱後之黏著力上升量較大。Moreover, from the comparison of Examples 6 to 9, it was confirmed that the adhesive force tends to decrease as the usage-amount of the polymer (B) increases. In Examples 7 to 8 in which the amount of polymer (B) used was within the range of 0.5 to 5 parts per 100 parts of polymer (A), the initial adhesion was less than 500 gf/25 mm, and the adhesion after heating was More than 500 gf/25 mm, it is better to take into account the light peeling at the initial stage of attachment and the increase in adhesion after heating. Moreover, as the usage-amount of a polymer (B) is large, a 23 degreeC surface elastic modulus becomes high, and there exists a tendency for bending recovery to become low. Furthermore, from the results of Examples 10 to 13, it was confirmed that the desired effect can be achieved even if the type of the polymer (A) of the adhesive or the type of the crosslinking agent is changed. Compared with Examples 12 to 13, Examples 10 to 11 showed a larger increase in adhesive force after heating.

進而,實施例14~20中,藉由使用觸媒,成功防止了氣泡產生。其中,實施例14~17、19~20中,鐵系觸媒之使用量係使黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為4.6E-5(4.6×10 -5)~9.2E-4(9.2×10 -4)的量,相對於初期之低黏著力,加熱後黏著力充分上升。尤其是實施例19,最為均衡地改善了初期黏著力、加熱後黏著力、彎曲回復性、彎曲保持力及氣泡產生防止。 Furthermore, in Examples 14 to 20, by using a catalyst, the generation of air bubbles was successfully prevented. Among them, in Examples 14 to 17 and 19 to 20, the amount of the iron-based catalyst used was such that the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst contained in the adhesive layer to the hydroxyl group ([catalyst]/[OH]) was 4.6E- The amount of 5 (4.6×10 -5 ) to 9.2E-4 (9.2×10 -4 ), compared with the initial low adhesive force, the adhesive force increased sufficiently after heating. In particular, in Example 19, the initial adhesive force, the adhesive force after heating, the flexural recovery, the flexural retention force, and the prevention of bubble generation were improved in the most balanced manner.

以上,對本發明之具體例進行了詳細說明,但其等僅為例示,並非限定申請專利範圍。申請專利範圍所記載之技術包含將以上所例示之具體例進行各種變化、變更者。As mentioned above, although the specific example of this invention was demonstrated in detail, it is only an illustration, and does not limit the scope of the patent application. The technology described in the scope of claims includes various changes and modifications of the specific examples illustrated above.

1,2,3:補強用膜 10:支持基材 10A:第一面 10B:第二面 21:黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層) 21A:黏著面(第一黏著面) 21B:黏著面(第二黏著面) 22:黏著劑層(第二黏著劑層) 22A:黏著面(第二黏著面) 31,32:剝離襯墊 100,200,300:附剝離襯墊之補強用膜 1,2,3: Reinforcing film 10: Support substrate 10A: The first side 10B: Second side 21: Adhesive layer (first adhesive layer) 21A: Adhesive side (first adhesive side) 21B: Adhesive Surface (Second Adhesive Surface) 22: Adhesive layer (second adhesive layer) 22A: Adhesive side (second adhesive side) 31, 32: Release liner 100, 200, 300: Reinforcing film with release liner

圖1係模式性地表示一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 圖2係模式性地表示另一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 圖3係模式性地表示另一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a configuration of a reinforcing film according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a reinforcing film according to another embodiment. 3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a reinforcing film according to another embodiment.

1:補強用膜 1: Reinforcing film

10:支持基材 10: Support substrate

10A:第一面 10A: The first side

10B:第二面 10B: Second side

21:黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層) 21: Adhesive layer (first adhesive layer)

21A:黏著面(第一黏著面) 21A: Adhesive side (first adhesive side)

31:剝離襯墊 31: Release Liner

100:附剝離襯墊之補強用膜 100: Reinforcing film with release liner

Claims (9)

一種補強用膜,其具備黏著劑層, 上述黏著劑層包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B), 上述聚合物(B)包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元, 上述黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa。 A reinforcing film, which has an adhesive layer, The above-mentioned adhesive layer comprises polymer (A) and polymer (B), The above-mentioned polymer (B) includes a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth)acrylic monomer unit, The surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer at 23° C. is 1-20 kPa. 如請求項1之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G' 23為10~200 kPa,於80℃下之體積彈性模數G' 80為5~100 kPa,且於80℃下之tanδ 80為0.10~0.60。 The reinforcing film of claim 1, wherein the bulk modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer at 23°C is 10-200 kPa, and the bulk modulus G' 80 at 80°C is 5-100 kPa, And tanδ 80 at 80°C is 0.10 to 0.60. 如請求項1或2之補強用膜,其中上述聚合物(A)為丙烯酸系聚合物。The reinforcing film according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the polymer (A) is an acrylic polymer. 如請求項1至3中任一項之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層中之上述聚合物(B)之含量相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.5~5重量份。The reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the content of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). 如請求項1至4中任一項之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層中所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03。The reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03. 如請求項1至5中任一項之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層包含觸媒, 上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10 -6~5.0×10 -2The reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the adhesive layer comprises a catalyst, and the molar ratio of the catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer ([catalyst]/[OH] ) is 1.0×10 -6 to 5.0×10 -2 . 如請求項6之補強用膜,其中上述觸媒為鐵系觸媒, 上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10 -4~1.0×10 -3The reinforcing film according to claim 6, wherein the catalyst is an iron-based catalyst, and the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is 1.0×10 -4 to 1.0×10 -3 . 一種光學構件,其貼合有如請求項1至7中任一項之補強用膜。An optical member to which the reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 7 is attached. 一種電子構件,其貼合有如請求項1至7中任一項之補強用膜。An electronic component to which the reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 7 is attached.
TW110128733A 2020-08-06 2021-08-04 Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component TW202212125A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020134187A JP2022030291A (en) 2020-08-06 2020-08-06 Reinforcing film, optical member and electronic member
JP2020-134187 2020-08-06

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202212125A true TW202212125A (en) 2022-04-01

Family

ID=80117365

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110128733A TW202212125A (en) 2020-08-06 2021-08-04 Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2022030291A (en)
KR (1) KR20230047162A (en)
CN (1) CN116075426A (en)
TW (1) TW202212125A (en)
WO (1) WO2022030304A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS57163482A (en) 1981-03-31 1982-10-07 Snow Brand Milk Prod Co Ltd Novel yeast having specific saccharide utilization
JPS5878594A (en) 1981-11-06 1983-05-12 Sankyo Co Ltd Preparation of antibiotic substance b-41d, e, and g
JP4919730B2 (en) * 2006-08-16 2012-04-18 日東電工株式会社 Double-sided adhesive tape or sheet and liquid crystal display device
JP6373458B2 (en) 2013-04-15 2018-08-15 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, and adhesive sheet
JP2016037578A (en) * 2014-08-08 2016-03-22 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet attached building component and adhesive sheet for building component
JP6770799B2 (en) 2014-11-28 2020-10-21 三星エスディアイ株式会社Samsung SDI Co., Ltd. Adhesive for optical film, adhesive layer for optical film, optical member and image display device
JP6737585B2 (en) 2015-11-27 2020-08-12 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and image display device
JP6755089B2 (en) 2015-11-27 2020-09-16 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, adhesive sheet, and image display device
JP6932421B2 (en) * 2016-08-15 2021-09-08 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive layer for flexible image display device, laminate for flexible image display device, and flexible image display device
JP6496066B1 (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-04-03 日東電工株式会社 Reinforcement film
JP6376271B1 (en) 2017-12-08 2018-08-22 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Manufacturing method of laminate for flexible device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2022030304A1 (en) 2022-02-10
KR20230047162A (en) 2023-04-06
JP2022030291A (en) 2022-02-18
CN116075426A (en) 2023-05-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6371931B1 (en) Adhesive sheet
JP6355874B1 (en) Adhesive sheet
TWI741191B (en) Adhesive sheet
TWI843788B (en) Adhesive Sheet
TWI838427B (en) Adhesive sheet
TW202208571A (en) Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member
TW202212126A (en) Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member
TW202212125A (en) Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component
TW202212127A (en) Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member
WO2024203752A1 (en) Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member
TWI859315B (en) Adhesive Sheet
WO2022054789A1 (en) Adhesive sheet
TW202116944A (en) Adhesive sheet including a polymer as a base polymer and thermally-expandable microspheres having an expansion starting temperature